JP7321824B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of playing games.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game ball wins a prize in a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is something configured in Further, a variable display means is provided that can variably display (also referred to as "variation") the identification information, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means is a specific display result, a predetermined game value is displayed. (so-called pachinko machines).

The winning value means paying out prize balls or awarding points or prizes according to the winning of game balls in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win the hit ball, or It is to generate a right to be in an advantageous state, or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In the pachinko machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started by the variable display means based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole. If it is, a "jackpot (advantageous state)" occurs. It should be noted that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round.

Furthermore, there is a pachinko game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting values, the next process can only be performed when the main process being executed is completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed. There is a risk.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing setting confirmation work .

(Means A) The game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
a predetermined period clock means for timing a predetermined period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game;
special variable display means capable of variably displaying the special identification information and displaying the result of the variable display;
special variable display timing means for timing a special variable display period during which special identification information is variably displayed;
stop period clocking means for timing a variable display stop period from when the variable display of the special identification information is stopped to when the variable display of the next special identification information is started;
production control means capable of controlling production;
an advantageous state notification effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous state notification effect for notifying that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
an advantageous state notification timing means for timing an advantageous state notification period during which the advantageous state notification effect is executed;
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the variable display stop period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the variable display stop period is interrupted until the end of the variable display stop period, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the variable display stop period is resumed,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the predetermined period is being counted, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. until the predetermined period of time is interrupted, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the predetermined period of time is resumed;
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the advantageous state notification period is interrupted until the period ends, and the timing of the advantageous state notification period is resumed when the setting confirmation state ends,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the special variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end of the special variable display period, and the timing of the special variable display period is restarted when the setting confirmation state ends,
The production control means is
When being controlled to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to receive operation confirmation information for confirming the operation of the predetermined effect means,
When receiving the operation confirmation information in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute processing according to the operation confirmation information.
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform the setting confirmation work.
(Means 1) Another gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko game Machine 1), game state control means capable of controlling a plurality of game states (for example, a portion that executes steps 080IWS2205 to S2207, S2210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227 in the game control microcomputer 100); When the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when executing the 50th variation display in the low-probability/high-base state), a predetermined display (eg, left-center-right decoration pattern) is displayed. A special effect execution means (for example, a part that executes steps 080IWS503, S505, S506, S508, and S512 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that is once invisible, and a variable display A variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing (variable display) is provided, and the special effect execution means generates a specific image (for example, FIG. 9-43 (B ) and a static image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are closed shown in FIG. 9-43 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 9-44 (B) and (C). (moving image) can be executed, and a plurality of types of the specific images can be displayed, and different types of the specific images are displayed according to the game state when controlled in an advantageous state, and the game state is displayed. The control means (CPU 103) controls an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability/high base state (variable probability state)) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player. , high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), and the selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 16-6 , The determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value), and in the special state (high probability / high base state (probability variable state)), the first period (game state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state) until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times), or until the jackpot game state is reached before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times period), and a second period after the first period (after the game state shifts to the high-probability/high-base state, a special game of a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times) without entering the jackpot game state. is executed (51st time or later or 101st time or later)), and in the first period, the selection ratio of variable display patterns having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period. (As shown in Figures 16-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "losing", in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], "no reach (shortening fluctuation)" (fluctuation The ratio of selecting "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds), which is a longer variable display period than the display period of 5 seconds, is higher than the second period is higher), and in the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (see FIGS. 16-6 (A1) and (C1)). As shown, when the display result is "loss", in the second period, "non-reach failure ( high-speed fluctuation)" (the fluctuation display period is 1 second) is higher than in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]). According to such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. Furthermore, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the amusement of the game.

(Means 2) In means 1, variable display execution capable of executing variable display of first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (eg, second special symbol) in parallel Means (for example, the part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100) and advantageous state control means (for example, game control A part that executes steps S122 to S125 in the microcomputer 100) and a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 for step S126 ~ Part that executes S128) and special state control means (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100 for special state (for example, KT state) that is more frequently controlled to special state than non-special state 080IWS2205 to S2207, S2210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227), and the special state control means includes, as special states, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and the first special state A second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the control is possible, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the third probability variable jackpot, a high probability / high base state (the first KT 50 times or 100 times of fluctuation display in the state) can be controlled based on the second special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is step 080IWS67A ~ S71A, S67B ~ S71B, S2226, S2227), when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information while being controlled to the non-special state, when the second identification information is controlled to the second special state The predetermined condition is less likely to be established than in the case of being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first probability variable jackpot or When the second probability variable jackpot occurs, it is immediately controlled to a high probability/low base state (second KT state), whereas the first probability variable jackpot and the second probability jackpot are controlled during the low probability/low base state (normal state). When a variable probability big hit occurs, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (1st KT state), and after that, when 50 times or 100 times of variable display is completed, it is controlled to a high probability/low base state (2nd KT state). is performed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the special state is configured to be controllable.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2, when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information while being controlled to the second special state, when controlled to the non-special state Predetermined conditions are more likely to be satisfied than when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, during the low probability/low base state (normal state), the When the 1st probability variable jackpot or the 2nd probability variable jackpot occurs, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and after that, when the variable display is completed 50 times or 100 times, the high probability / low base state ( 2nd KT state), while high probability / low base state (2nd KT state) immediately high probability / low base state (second 2KT state), and as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection rate of the first variable probability big hit and the second variable probability big hit is high). may have been According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") with different advantages for the player. In a game machine with a low advantage, the predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the advantage is set to a high setting value (specifically, FIG. 9-1 And as shown in FIG. 9-2, since the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability, it is executed up to 50 times or 100 times of fluctuation display that will result in a jackpot in the high probability/high base state (1st KT state). and transition to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state)). According to such a configuration, even when the advantage is set to a low set value, it is possible to create expectations and improve interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any of means 1 to 4, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when the 50th change in the low probability/high base state is displayed) ), a specific image (for example, a static image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43(B) and 9-44(A) are closed) is displayed and a predetermined display (for example, left A special effect executing means (for example, steps 080IWS503, S505, S506, S508, and S512 in the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that temporarily makes the center right decorative pattern invisible) is executed. part), and the special effect execution means can display a plurality of types of specific images (for example, still images shown in FIGS. 9-46 (A) to (C)), and the game when controlled in an advantageous state Depending on the state, different types of specific images are displayed (for example, when the shutter performance is executed in the 50th variation display of the low probability / high base state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A) Upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "END" are displayed, and an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is a low probability/low base state (normal state) or a low probability/high base state. 9-46(B), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "Intense Heat Standby" are displayed, and the game state is a high probability/low base state (second KT state). 9-46(C), upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 containing numbers are displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to means A1 and subsequent means below. Conventionally, in game machines, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values that have different advantages for a player, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306. A game machine that selects a variation pattern has been proposed.

However, in a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, if the set value is high, the period required until the next big win occurs is short, and the gambling nature becomes too high. There is a problem that sound playability cannot be realized. In addition, when the set value is low, there is a problem that the period required until the next big hit occurs is long, which reduces the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, while realizing sound game playability and improving interest.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) that controls the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 16-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
In the first period, the selection rate of the variable display pattern with the variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is " In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when it becomes "loss", "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection rate of the variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When "losing" occurs, in the second period, "non-reach losing (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is higher than the first period [excluding the final change])
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time saving state) advantageous to the player )) and
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120 can After the end, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the first of any game state Even in one period, the production mode is controlled to chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting a shift from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 16-13 (1) and (5) to (7) , 1st period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the 1st special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" After the 100th special game), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that game balls can easily enter.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the jackpot game is over, the state is shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and 100 times of fluctuation When the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuation challenge performance is executed in the 100th variation display, and from the 101st variation display, it shifts to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the fact that the game state is different from the advantageous state and is controlled a predetermined number of times to the special state that is advantageous to the player (high accuracy/high probability after the end of the jackpot game). When the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of small wins reaches 50 after shifting to the 1st KT state (probability variable state), the number of occurrences of small wins is changed to 50th. Executes the continuous challenge performance of the success mode, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next time fluctuation display of the fluctuation display where the number of occurrences of the small hit has reached 50 times)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect suggesting a set value (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect),
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%.On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect only in the final variation of the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except the final change of the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) as a special effect suggesting a set value,
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period are different (when the game state is a high probability / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), in step S21TM1010 it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. As shown, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Corresponding display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Corresponding display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an action effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period (the execution rate of the action presentation is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). It is possible to execute a notice production),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the foreseeing advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), it is possible to set any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, and the variation according to the set value A game machine for selecting patterns has been proposed. When a game machine capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (Fig. 19) is controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player. There is room for improving the interest of The inventions relating to means B1 to means B11 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and in a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, control is performed in a state advantageous to the player. The purpose is to improve the interest when being played.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 16-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
The effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 has a variation pattern with super reach (“super reach out”, “super In "reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, the ally character and the enemy character have a battle to perform a battle effect to notify whether or not the jackpot is won)),
The execution ratio of the specific effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the specific effect in the second period (when the variable display result is "no", as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A1) In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate of selecting "super reach out" as the fluctuation pattern is [10%], whereas as shown in FIG. 16-6 (C1), In the second period, the percentage of “super reach out” selected as the variation pattern is [0%])
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the special state.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time reduction state) advantageous to the player )) and
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120 can After the end, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the first of any game state Since the production mode is controlled to Chance Time even in one period, the common "Evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common characters "Chance Time" are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting a shift from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 16-13 (1) and (5) to (7) , 1st period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the 1st special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" After the 100th special game), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that game balls can easily enter.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the jackpot game is over, the state is shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and 100 times of fluctuation When the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuation challenge performance is executed in the 100th variation display, and from the 101st variation display, it shifts to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the fact that the game state is different from the advantageous state and is controlled a predetermined number of times to the special state that is advantageous to the player (high accuracy/high probability after the end of the jackpot game). When the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of small wins reaches 50 after shifting to the 1st KT state (probability variable state), the number of occurrences of small wins is changed to 50th. Executes the continuous challenge performance of the success mode, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next time fluctuation display of the fluctuation display where the number of occurrences of the small hit has reached 50 times)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect suggesting a set value (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect),
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%.On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect only in the final variation of the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except the final change of the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) as a special effect suggesting a set value,
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period are different (when the game state is a high probability / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), in step S21TM1010 it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. As shown, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B9,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period (the execution rate of the action presentation is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B10,
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). It is possible to execute a notice production),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the foreseeing advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player can be set, and an effect suggesting the set value can be set. A gaming machine has been proposed that executes With respect to the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), there is room for improving the interest of the presentation related to the setting suggestions. The inventions relating to the means C1 to C11 have been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and their object is to improve the interest of the performance related to the suggestion of the setting.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state;
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) related to setting suggestion,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 16-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
The selection ratio of the specific variable display pattern differs between the first period and the second period (when the variable display result is "mismatch", as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A1) and (C1) , The selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach (“missing super reach”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern (“missing super reach”) with super reach in the second period) ,
The execution ratio of the special effect differs between the first period and the second period (in the first period, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variable display, so On the other hand, in the second period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final change of the second period, so the final change of the second period The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except for is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for the final variation in the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time saving state) advantageous to the player )) and
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120 can After the end, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the first of any game state Even in one period, the production mode is controlled to chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting a shift from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 16-13 (1) and (5) to (7) , 1st period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the 1st special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" After the 100th special game), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that game balls can easily enter.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the jackpot game is over, the state is shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and 100 times of fluctuation When the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuation challenge performance is executed in the 100th variation display, and from the 101st variation display, it shifts to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the fact that the game state is different from the advantageous state and is controlled a predetermined number of times to the special state that is advantageous to the player (high accuracy/high probability after the end of the jackpot game). When the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of small wins reaches 50 after shifting to the 1st KT state (probability variable state), the number of occurrences of small wins is changed to 50th. Executes the continuous challenge performance of the success mode, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next time fluctuation display of the fluctuation display where the number of occurrences of the small hit has reached 50 times)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%.On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect only in the final variation of the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except the final change of the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect),
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period are different (when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), in step S21TM1010 it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. As shown, if the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C8,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (reserved display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period (the execution rate of the action presentation is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C10,
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). It is possible to execute a notice production),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the foreseeing advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Some conventional game machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the setting value (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). . The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 includes, for example, a determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random number within a predetermined numerical range for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state. , based on the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set in the game machine, it is judged whether or not to control to the advantageous state. Alternatively, it is conceivable to vary the probability of controlling to an advantageous state by varying the number of advantageous state determination values for each set value set in the gaming machine. However, in the case where the advantageous condition determination value is set differently for each setting value set in the game machine, if the advantageous condition determination value is set over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for judgment will match the advantageous condition determination value. Since it is necessary to determine whether or not to perform the control for a plurality of times, there is a problem that the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state increases. The inventions relating to means 1 to 21 have been made by paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state. do.

The gaming machine described in means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 12) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, the numerical range The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means,
The advantageous state determination means reads the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41). 207SGS550), the advantageous condition determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information is combined with the advantageous condition determination value included in the common numerical range. , is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the random number values for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination match (for example, the CPU 103 performs 207SG556 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41 in the process of 207SG550, the part that sets the display result determination table according to the set value read out in the process of 207SG550)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the advantageous condition determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set each time the advantageous condition determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous condition. It is possible to prevent inappropriate judgments from being made.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 2,
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as determined used set value information (for example, the CPU 103 can store the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41). In the process of 207SGS566, the set value set in the process of 207SGS550 is updated and stored as the determined used set value),
A collation capable of collating whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means at predetermined intervals. It is characterized by further comprising means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 compares the set value identified in the process of 207SGS550 with the determined used set value in the process of 207SGS552 shown in FIG. 13-41).
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous condition determination value is set by inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 3,
The collation means performs collation every time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state as the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-41, the CPU 103 performs variable display The part that executes the processing of 207SGS552 each time it is executed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, each time it is determined by the advantageous state determination means whether or not to control to the advantageous state, the comparison is performed, so that it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to means 3 or 4,
Error notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120 error notification processing (207SGS439) that can execute error notification that the set value information is abnormal when the comparison result of the comparison means is not the same) is executed to display a notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, it is possible to make those around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value information is abnormal, and to promptly take measures against the abnormal setting value information.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to means 5,
The game control means controls the game to a game disabled state in which the game is disabled when the result of the verification by the verification means is not the same, and outputs error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as a comparison result of 207SGS552, the loop processing is performed) and a part that executes the processing of 207SGS554 and transmits an error designation command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the error notification process (207SGS439), from the CPU 103 A portion that determines whether or not an error designation command has been received, and executes error notification in accordance with the received error designation command when an error designation command is received)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-41, the variable display result determination module is The part that determines the variable display result using
Reservation storage means (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 13-39 as a start winning judgment process a part that executes the processing of 207SGS510 in
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state can be determined based on the reserved storage. the part that executes the time random number determination process),
further comprising
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to the advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins The part that determines the variable display result using the variable display result determination module in the random value determination process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the advance determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means;
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
further comprising
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display result has become a small hit) The part that updates the value of the figure process flag to 8 ″ and controls to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is a common value continuous from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination part set as a common numeric range of values),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and a special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. 13-17 ~ as shown in Figure 13-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always reads the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display, A part that sets a display result determination table according to the read set value and determines whether or not the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic part, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In this case, the processing for setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting values specified from these setting value information can be shared, so that the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
For the setting value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, pachinko game If the setting value set in machine 1 is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, with respect to the most disadvantageous set value for the player, only the common numerical range of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range may be targeted to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 12) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, the numerical range The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined as predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means generates a common numerical range and a non-common numerical value of the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and the probability of determining that the control to the advantageous state is determined is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. A game control that can be controlled to a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is a number or a special state corresponding to a special number that is the number of the advantageous state determination value increased with respect to the normal number based on becoming the advantageous state. Means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 12),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value within the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in Figures 13-17 and 13-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined as predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means generates a common numerical value range and a non-common numerical value of the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 11,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state when the advantageous state determining means determines to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state when the special state determining means determines to control to the special state Game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 12),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is set as a small hit reference value from 32767 to 33094 The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value to the small hit game state part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, they are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. As shown in 13-20, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set as a small hit reference value of 32767, which is a common value regardless of the fluctuation special figure. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 12),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The special state determination value is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to be the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, The numerical range is different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the small hit standard is always 32767 if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a value, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as a small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special condition judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous condition judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special condition judgment value can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including an advantage judgment value and a disadvantage judgment value with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the above-mentioned advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable set value for the player to the most advantageous set value for the player) A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 12 for executing the special symbol process);
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state part),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state at the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of whether the setting value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state is set so that the second common numerical range is continuous from the value (for example, As shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. And in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1674, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, definite variable state regardless of whether 32767 is always small It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a hit reference value, and if the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, probability variable state Regardless of whether The part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Furthermore, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value, the special state determination means always sets the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since it suffices to specify the same numerical range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous condition determination means generates a common value for the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value. A process of determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once to determine whether to control to an advantageous state based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range. load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value While it is necessary to determine whether to control to a special state based on the range a plurality of times, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls to an advantageous state based on the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value and the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to be in the special state only once, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 12) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set value ( 2 to 6 values excluding 1) is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 13-55 and 13 As shown in -56, when the setting value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the setting value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to make the probabilities of the set values different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values is the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous condition determination values. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Any set value among a plurality of stages of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) value) can be set (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the set value change process shown in FIG. 13-32);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 12) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a common numerical range for each setting value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237); A non-common numerical range for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, which is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) ) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 13-55 and 13 As shown in -56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to vary the probabilities of the game being played, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 16,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIGS. 13-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 12),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. is set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set to the same number in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, FIGS. 13-53 and 13 As shown in -54, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range including 328 consecutive judgment values regardless of the set value. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Especially in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous condition determination value and the numerical value range of the special condition determination value are set continuously, the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination is Whether it is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the value or the special state judgment value (whether it is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or not), the random number for judgment generated by the random number generation means for judgment is the minimum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state determination value, or the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control and the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 17,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 12),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same numbers are set so as to form a continuous second common numerical range,
The advantageous condition determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value within the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, regardless of the set value, Part where the range from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value to the small hit game state part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit The number of determination values included in the numerical range of values is 328, and when the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655. The numerical range of the judgment value is a numerical range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. As a hit reference value, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value is within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value, The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the first reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. can be performed, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 18,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIGS. 13-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 12 for executing the special symbol process);
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is the small hit reference value and the 32767 to 33094 The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state part),
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of whether it is the set value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, FIGS. 13-17 to 13- 20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In a different range, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or game state is normal state, time saving state, probability variable state, 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as a small hit reference value It is set as a continuous numerical range, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, probability variable state Always 32767 small hit reference value The part set as a continuous numerical range from 3267 to 33421 as
The number of special condition determination values is the same number regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, the numerical range of the small hit , If the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value that is set, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value, and the fluctuation special figure is the second If it is a special pattern, regardless of the setting value that is set, the part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value to the small hit game state part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. It is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol If there is, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 328, and if the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655 However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In the range, with 32767 as a small hit reference value, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, 32767 to 33421 part set in the numerical range of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 12),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to the value (2 to 6 values excluding 1),
The first common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference value The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 13-55 And as shown in FIG. 13-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value part),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. The same number is set so as to be a second common numerical value range that is continuous from a second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, the numerical value In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, it is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094 part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421 if the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A setting means (for example, the setting value change shown in FIG. 13-32 by the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state the part that performs the processing) and
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 12),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the setting value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-20, the set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) and a non-common numerical value range (for example, a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means. numeric range) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-17, if the set value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 13-55 and As shown in 13-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set in the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value ),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical range from a second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment , In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094 If the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the character object control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flow chart which shows a role product control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the list of the game states controlled after a big-hit game for every big-hit classification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 080IW. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a stop symbol of the small symbol. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing shutter effect start processing 1 and shutter effect start processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of hitting to the right information. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rendering mode of a shutter rendering; It is an explanatory view for explaining a switching mode of the display of the decoration design. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the shutter effect executed in the 50th variation of the irregular jackpot or the low probability/high base state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data used in a shutter effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of displaying a still image used in shutter effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing types of images displayed in a shutter effect; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the third modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of switching display of decorative symbols in Modification 5; 15 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol stop process in Modification 6. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing in modification 6; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a special design display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st suspension indicator and a 2nd suspension indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the variable probability state. It is a figure showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the variable probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. 4 is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining changes in display contents of a display monitor; It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormal error or recovery from power failure during setting change. It is a diagram. (A) is a diagram showing changes in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the holding display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change process, and (B) is when a set value abnormal error occurs, or It shows a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when the power is restored during the setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display result determination module; It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state; It is an explanatory diagram showing an initial pattern for each received command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a notification mode when the pachinko game machine is started. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing operation speeds in operations of non-detection operation control and operation control for actual operation confirmation; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the end timing of setting value change and setting value confirmation and the number of executions of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop completion|finish process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a figure which illustrates the production|presentation control command in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic portion 40F. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a low probability state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a high probability state; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a low probability / low base state, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a low probability / high base state (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the pending display and the active display in the high-probability/high-base state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow regarding each production mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], and (B) is an explanation showing the fluctuation pattern judgment table referred to in the first period [final fluctuation] FIG. 8C is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table referred to in the second period; It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot gaming state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the special figure 10 jackpot game state ends. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a first setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not a cut-in advance notice effect is to be executed, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a second setting suggestion effect. is an explanatory diagram showing an execution/non-execution decision table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode regarding the first setting suggestive effect in the first period, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode related to the first setting suggestive effect in the second period. be. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a second setting suggestion presentation; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding continuous challenge production|presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. there is The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second reserved display for displaying the reserved indication corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. It is In this way, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the entry of the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area, the game ball can be shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed hitting). operation), the game ball can win in the first start winning hole.

In addition, in this example, only when left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, the game ball is configured to be able to win in the first start winning hole, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the first starting winning opening on the left side of the game area, or the first starting winning opening A hole may be provided on the left side of the game area and a line of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize hole only when left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. A large winning opening positioned below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved toward, and the opening control is executed to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole. 2, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged so as to be adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which game balls flow down is extended in the front-rear direction. By moving back and forth, the special winning port located below the bottom member and the second start winning port can be opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. change to The special variable winning ball device 17 is a bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, and the opening control is executed to open the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved when the symbol is drawn out and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20, The opening control is executed to open the second start winning opening which is the winning area.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B therebelow.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in an open state, the game ball falling into the second starting winning opening enters the special variable winning opening. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17 . On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. there is In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with regulation pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the motion of the forward/backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the control piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable prize ball device 6B is operated from the variable prize ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the big winning hole to get a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass through (enter) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special winning hole to obtain a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big win game or in a KT state (so-called small win time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In this pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role of a normal starting area. However, even when a big win pattern is derived and displayed, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the state shifts to a big win game state, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. .

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's turning operation of a hitting ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to perform a left-handed operation, a first special symbol is displayed. A first special game is started by the device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the result is a "big hit". . Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth, and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating special figures) than in the normal state (time saving state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state, and the high base state continue until one of the end conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state, is met first. do. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of becoming, is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on) It is in a state where

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol varies depending on the type of big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the big winning symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the lighting of the frame LED 9 Etc./turning off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100 . The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (eg, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further controls a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hitting notification LED 37. It supplies it to the substrate 13 and supplies an LED signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control substrate 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 based on the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In the power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S4; Yes). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution of the first special symbol game, management of suspension, etc. are realized (details will be described later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the role product control process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the control of the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the role product control process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the effect control command to be transmitted in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the start prize to the first start prize winning port, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the first pending memory number, the look-ahead determination etc. to the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 .

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is a ``big hit'' or a ``small hit'', or whether or not to be a ``big hit'', is determined based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any of the big hit symbol, the small winning symbol, and the losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing for determining either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It designates the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. do.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. During the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where the variable display of the second special symbols results in a small hit and the game is controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing to determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the period of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in an effect that gives the player a sense of incompatibility. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small winning control and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed, the small winning ending period may be lengthened compared to the first KT state. . In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. It includes the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big win", setting processing for starting the big win game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small win game is performed. And, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the KT state, or the high base state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the second special symbol is varied. During the display, there is a case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol and the game is controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing-Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Incidentally, regarding the small-hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small-hit fanfare period and the small-hit ending period may be varied according to the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process. In this role product control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the role product control process flag provided in the RAM 102 . In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the role product control process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The role product control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big win game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big win game is performed, the process for starting the big win game is performed. , the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the role product control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing is completed.

The process during jackpot opening in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In the process during the opening of the big win, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the big winning gate to the closed state, the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is executed, and then the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , ends the process during jackpot opening.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . When the number of execution times of the round has not reached the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the role control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the character control process The flag value is updated to "5". When the value of the role product control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "5". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a setting process for opening the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". In this small winning open process, the processing of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning port is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small winning open processing is ended.

The small hit end process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various production devices such as actions is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is terminated.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description on Characteristic Portion 080IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 080IW will be described. First, the game state in this characterizing portion 080IW will be described. First, the game state in this characterizing portion 080IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. The case of being controlled, the case of being controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and the case of being controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , is controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, resulting in a small hit. Even if is generated, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is delivered to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal game hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of determining a small hit is low when the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio of determining a small hit when the second special pattern fluctuates is high (however, it will be described later). Therefore, the KT state is a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing variations in the second special symbols, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration for making the KT state into a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal hit is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of variation in the KT state to a certain time is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, this characteristic portion 080IW is configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or longer. Specifically, the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow-down path of the game ball are adjusted. Although details will be described later, this characteristic part 080IW is configured such that the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to an open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes through in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds which is the required time until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, if the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, the one game ball passes through the passage gate 41. game balls can win prizes in the variable winning ball device 6B as they are.

(big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 9-1 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 9-2 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 9-1, the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1(A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order. It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times compared to the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the setting value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value and the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9-2, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order. It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the winning probability of the overall jackpot is 10 times compared to the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the setting value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2), compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1), the small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when performing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when performing the variable display of the first special symbol greater than the number of decision values for the decision). In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the determination values corresponding to deviation are included in the determination values corresponding to all set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 9-2). -1 and as shown in FIG. 9-2, there is no set value for which the probability of deviation is 0). The judgment value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, depending on which setting value is "1" to "6") , with different outlier probabilities).

It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the probability of deviation is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to deviation). For example, at the set value "6", which has the highest degree of advantage (highest jackpot probability), the probability of losing is 0, and the judgment value corresponding to the losing may not be included.

Further, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured so that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in Figures 9-1 (A), (B) and Figures 9-2 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state) The odds of losing are different, but in the probability state (high probability state), the jackpot probability has increased for the non-probability state (low probability state), so the probability of a small hit is higher than the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the out-of-probability. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine having substantially less than 6 levels of settable levels or a gaming machine with no difference in the degree of advantage due to the setting change function, a game machine of a type having a setting change function of 6 levels and a hardware/software configuration are provided. can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
9-3 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is set to ``normal jackpot'', ``first probability variable jackpot'', and `` This table is referred to for determining either the second probability variable jackpot or the third probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this characteristic portion 080IW, regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, With a probability of 35%, it is determined as a "normal jackpot", with a probability of 30%, it is determined as a "first variable jackpot", with a probability of 30%, it is determined as a "second variable jackpot", and with a probability of 5%, it is determined as a "second hit". 3 definite variable jackpot". In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in this characteristic portion 080IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is determined to be a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%, "first variable jackpot" with a probability of 5%, and "second variable jackpot" with a probability of 10%, and with a probability of 50% It is determined as the "third probability variable jackpot".

A "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of four rounds and transitions to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game state ends. After shifting to the low-probability/high-base state, the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed or the next big win occurs. Also, when the 50 times of fluctuation display is finished, the state shifts to the low probability/low base state.

The "first variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a four-round jackpot game state and transitions to a variable probability state (high probability state) after the jackpot game state is completed. In this case, depending on the game state when the variable display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) or the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state) ). After transitioning to the high-probability/high-base state, the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the 50th or 100th variation display is completed or the next big win occurs. Also, when 50 times or 100 times of variable display is completed, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state. In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability/low-base state, the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big win occurs.

"Second probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifted to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the jackpot game state is completed. In this case, depending on the game state when the variable display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) or the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state) ). After shifting to the high-probability/high-base state, the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed or the next big win occurs. Also, when the 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state. In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability/low-base state, the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big win occurs.

The "third probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifted to a probability variable state (high probability state) after the jackpot game state is completed. In this case, regardless of the game state when the variation display is stopped and the jackpot symbols are derived and displayed, the game state is shifted to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability/low-base state, the high-probability/low-base state is maintained until the next big win occurs.

In this example, the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) is more advantageous than the high-probability/high base state (first KT state) because it is easier for the game ball to enter the special winning hole during the small win game. Therefore, in this example, the "third probability variable jackpot" is the most advantageous jackpot type, the "second probability variable jackpot" is the second most advantageous jackpot type, and the "first probability variable jackpot" is the second most advantageous jackpot type. It is a big hit type, and "normal big hit" is the most disadvantageous big hit type.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection probability of "normal jackpot", "first probability variable jackpot", and "second probability variable jackpot" Since it is high, the high-probability/low base state (2nd KT state) is likely to end when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the high-probability/low base state (2nd KT state) and a big win is achieved. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, since the selection probability of the "third probability variable jackpot" is high, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed during the high probability/low base state (second KT state). is executed to result in a big hit, the high probability/low base state (second KT state) tends to continue.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. Control is performed to execute variable display. In this example, 99/100 is uniformly applied regardless of whether it is in the probability variable state, whether it is in the KT state, or whether it is in the high base state. It is determined to be a normal pattern with a probability of . Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a high base flag indicating a high base state is set, and if the high base flag is set (if in a high base state), the variable winning ball device 6B. is open for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (if it is in a low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characterizing portion 080IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 12 for the first special design and decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special design and decorative design 34 types #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, fluctuation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

Also, if the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state is completed. , the first special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT and fiftieth variation shown in FIG. 9-4(B) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, any of the first variation patterns #07 to #09 is determined by As shown in FIG. 9-5(G), in the low-probability/first KT state fiftieth variation display, first variation patterns #07 to #09 with a relatively short variation time of 5 seconds are determined.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if it is a KT state other than the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state (low probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state) , the first special symbol variation pattern table for other KT shown in FIG. 9-4 (C) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in other KT states, one of the first variation patterns #10 to #12 is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-5 (D) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5(D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the game is lost, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined as a small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 080IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is achieved, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball into the special winning hole. end up Therefore, in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), even if the second special symbol is displayed in a non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. By lowering , the frequency of occurrence of small hits is rather reduced, thereby preventing a situation in which an attempt is made to acquire prize balls by small hits even in the non-KT state. In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, the "occurrence frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, is higher than normal.

It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the second special symbol variation display is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is is comparatively long as 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at a prize ball by winning a prize in the special prize winning opening unfairly during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big win, it is not necessary to digest the first reserved memory longer than in the case of a small win, so the variation time is set to be shorter than in the case of a small win. there is

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the low probability/first KT state, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state. Select the variation pattern table accordingly. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state is lost, the variation time is 5 seconds and the shortened variation is the second variation pattern # 04. It is determined. Also, when determining a small hit as the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening open Preparatory fluctuation pattern). In this characteristic part 080IW, as already explained, when it is controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. A special winning hole in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediate. If the device 17 is controlled to be open, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special prize winning opening. Therefore, in this characteristic part 080IW, in the first variation of the 1KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before the transition to the 1KT state. By controlling the special variable prize winning ball device 17 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member fall down to enable prize winning to the special prize winning port, This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Also, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the variation display of the 2nd to 49th variation is executed after finishing the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state, the low probability shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) The second special symbol variation pattern table for the probability/first KT and for the 2nd to 49th variation is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 Either is decided. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state are missed, the second fluctuation pattern # of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds # 07, or a second variation pattern #08 with a shorter variation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state are out, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shorter variation time of 1 second. It may be determined to be the second variation pattern #11 of shortening variation. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #07 and #10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #08 and #11 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

Also, if the 50th fluctuation display (that is, the final fluctuation in the low probability/1st KT state) is executed after finishing the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state. , the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT and fiftieth variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is determined by As shown in FIG. 9-5(G), in the 50th variation display in the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 executes a shutter performance, and the variation time is 5 seconds, which is a relatively short variation display. 2 variation patterns #14 to #16 are determined.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variation display of the first special symbol in the other KT state results in a big hit, the first variation pattern # with a variation time of 10 seconds 10. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the variation display of the first special symbol. Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a forced loss, the forced failure occurs frequently despite the second KT state, and the player wins a small win. You will not receive any benefit from Therefore, in this characteristic part 080IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the transition to the big hit game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this characteristic portion 080IW, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the configuration that does not force the variation of the second special symbol (for example, the first When the second special symbol is fluctuating when the special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit during the KT state. may be a long variable time (eg, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the variation display of the first special symbol. You will not be able to receive any profits from small wins. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is enough time to generate at least multiple small hits. (eg, 1 minute).

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/first KT state, a big win game based on the first variable probability big win or the second variable probability big win that triggered the high probability/first KT state is performed. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations after the end. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 is determined by

As with the first variation in the low-probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern #17, which is short variation of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, even if it is determined to be a loss as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern #18 with reach. Further, even when it is determined to be a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for preparing for opening the second start winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined as a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6(H), when determining a big hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Also, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the first variable probability jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, see FIG. 9-6. A second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/first KT and second and subsequent variations shown in (I) is selected to determine a variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 determined by

It should be noted that, as with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. A second variation pattern #22 of shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or a second variation pattern #23 of shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to the second variation pattern #24 with reach. In addition, when determining a small hit as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second The second variation pattern #26 of variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #22 and #25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #23 and #26 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when it is determined as a big hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) is A variation pattern is determined upon selection. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, any one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #29 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In other cases, the second variation pattern #30 of normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern # 32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds or a normal variation time of 5 seconds The second variation pattern #33 of variation may be determined. Also, when determining a big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 9-7(1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 respectively in the 1KT state, and FIG. 9-7(2) respectively shows the opening patterns in the 2KT state. The opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are shown.

First, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7(1). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display device 20 executes a variable display of normal symbols, When it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加In this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying winning symbols and losing symbols is set to 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When the game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is decided to make a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. becomes possible. However, in the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device on the upstream side 6B has a long release time of 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning hole (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuation displays).

In the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened only in the following normal symbols. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the total of 0.2 seconds of fluctuation time, 0.2 seconds of design determination time, and 0.1 seconds of pre-processing time for opening the second starting winning opening, has passed. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 080IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 080IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state because After 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because the time from the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 to the arrival of the game ball at the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the game ball normally does not change the pattern. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when it is controlled to the state. Therefore, in the 1KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed easily wins the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the release pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 2KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7(2). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display device 20 performs normal symbol variation display, When it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加In this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1.0 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying winning symbols and losing symbols is set to 0.2 seconds. ing. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), after the pattern fixing time of 0.2 seconds has passed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process is set to 2.6 seconds. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When a game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball wins in the special winning opening. It becomes possible.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is at least 3.8 seconds (ordinary design fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + design determination time 0 A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening processing is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. A game ball easily enters a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side and easily enters a special winning hole.

In addition, in the second KT state, game balls are likely to enter the special winning hole and prize balls are easily obtained. ” is displayed.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 080IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the normal pattern fluctuation time 1.0 seconds, the pattern confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 2.6 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal pattern is not varied. The game ball reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled to . Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the process of executing the variable display of normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). (see step S26) is executed. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), or whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot game state or not, the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) is used to determine whether or not to hit a regular pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time are the same in the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state by 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening opening processing is the same. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state, but that is the only aspect. can't For example, by making the variation time and the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be varied by changing the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, by shortening the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of prizes in the special winning openings in the first KT state. .

As will be described later, in the first KT state, the characteristic portion 080IW controls to the high base state by setting a high base flag indicating the high base state, thereby achieving the high base state shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). Thus, control is performed so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIG. ing.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, as shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 9-7 (2) is opened for a short time. It may be configured to control with a 2-open pattern (short open). That is, the special flag may be set only in the 1KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when executing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased according to the 49th special symbol variation stop in the 50 special symbol shortened variation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being open for a long time when the left-hand shot is notified after the low probability/first KT state is finished. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured using the flag (special flag) for controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variable display of the special symbol is used. In this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

Also, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is increased in the low probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are shot. , it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low-probability/non-KT state.

Incidentally, in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning balls are variable winning balls in a state where the normal symbols are stopped from varying and there is no reserved memory of the normal symbols. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture aiming at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when it becomes a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate The variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball passing through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the winning of the special winning hole becomes possible). On the other hand, in this characteristic part 080IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. is set to start, it is possible to eliminate capture elements by a shooting operation aimed at the small hit generation timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, commands 8000(H) to 800C(H) and 8011(H) to 8032(H) are decorations variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to variable display of special symbols. It is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the symbol. It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decoration pattern. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (loss designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (first probability variable jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the first probability variable jackpot) is. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (second probability variable big hit designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as the second probability variable big hit) is. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (third probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the 3rd probability variable jackpot) is. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 6 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It can be determined that it is a display result specifying command for the first special symbol, and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result specifying command for the second special symbol, so the display result The designation command can be used for both the first special design and the second special design, but the display result designation command for the first special design and the display result designation command for the second special design may be separate.

In addition, instead of the game control microcomputer 100 transmitting the display result designation command, the variation pattern is made to correspond to each of the normal jackpot/first probability variable jackpot/second probability variable jackpot/third probability variable jackpot/minor hit/loss. A command is determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop pattern of the decoration pattern based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 has been started.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol determination designation command) capable of specifying stop of variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second compulsory design determination designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special design is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent out from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. B001(H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) that designates the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first start winning opening while the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second start winning opening while the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective starting winning designation command and the second effective starting winning designation command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 .

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Also, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that designates the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, when the setting value is set to "1", command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to "6", command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-8 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(First special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-10 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 080IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the normal accessory control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 080IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first pending memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (Step 080IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 080IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the first reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiably preserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55A). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 080IWS55A. A set value command is also sent when

The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. It may be configured to

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non-KT state is set, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued. If there is, it is determined to be in the low probability/first KT state and a low probability/first KT background designation command is issued. Determine and issue a high probability/first KT background designation command, and if the variable probability flag is on and the high base flag is off, determine that it is in a high probability/second KT state and issue a high probability/second KT background designation command, Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit variation (step 080IWS57A). Concretely, when the second big win flag indicating that the big win will be made is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big win variation. When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A without performing the processing after step 080IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the second special pattern, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 080IWS57A, when the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 080IWS59A, at the time of starting winning A win may be forcibly determined regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 080IWS57A, without performing the processing of steps 080IWS58A to S63A, a random number value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 080IWS58A), and executes the big hit determination module (step 080IWS59A). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 080IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 080IWS61A). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the first variable probability jackpot, the second variable probability jackpot, or the third variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS62A), and the jackpot type is stored ( Step 080IWS63A), and shift to step 080IWS67A.

Further, when the big hit is not determined at step 080IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 080IWS64A). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 080IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 080IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of remaining high base states is "0" (step 080IWS67A), and if it is "0", step 080IWS74A. Move to If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 080IWS68A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 080IWS69A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 080IWS70A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS71A). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is being shortened (step 080IWS72A ). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended until the end of variation (step 080IWS73A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A.

In this characteristic portion 080IW, as will be described later, the reason why the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed is the low probability/high base state ( When the variable display is executed 50 times under the control of low probability/1st KT state), and when the jackpot game based on the 1st probability variable big hit or the 2nd probability variable big hit ends, the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT) state) and 50 or 100 times of variable display is performed. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 080IWS69A and S69B, and determined as N in steps 080IWS71A and S71B. Then, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A, S70B, and the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 080IWS72A, S72B, and the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) . On the other hand, in the case of the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), when starting the 50th or 100th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 080IWS69A and S69B, and steps 080IWS71A and 080IWS71A. It is judged as Y in S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A and S70B, and the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (second KT state).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed notification and continues the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as a game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state This is a flag for setting the effect background in common with the first KT state while maintaining the state.

Then, in step 080IWS74A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74A). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 080IWS74A.

In step 080IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(First variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-11 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sets a special figure time saving flag or lighting extension flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. is confirmed (step 080IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time saving flag and the lighting extension flag and shortening the variable display of the special symbol ( (See FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6), it becomes a state in which small hits are likely to occur, so the state is controlled to the KT state. If neither the special figure time saving flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is used as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, FIG. 9-4 The first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in (A) is selected (step 080IWS1701A).

If the special figure time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is the first for KT as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. A special symbol variation pattern table is selected (step 080IWS1702A). At step 080IWS1702A, if the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if the last variation display in the low-probability/first KT state is executed, the CPU 103 changes to FIG. Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / 1KT time and 50th variation shown.On the other hand, if the special figure time saving flag is set, others shown in Figure 9-4 (C) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 080IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 9-4 is to be used (step 080IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1704A).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 080IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. measurement is started (step 080IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 080IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 080IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 9-12 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 080IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 080IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 080 IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

When the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step 080IWS1125A). In addition, whether or not the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display is, for example, confirmed whether the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a process other than the second special symbol normal process. can be determined by If the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag (step 080IWS1127A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS1128A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129A).

When it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1125A and when it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1126A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (1st KT state), the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the second special symbol has started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1127A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (1KT state), the variation display If the variable display of the second special symbol is started before the end of , the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to end the low probability / high base state. and then transition to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 080IWS1130A). Whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big hit symbol is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 080IWS1131A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 080IWS1132A). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a variable probability big hit (first variable big hit to third big hit) (step 080IWS1133A). ). Whether or not it is a variable probability big hit (first variable probability big hit to third variable probability big win) can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of big win stored in step 080IWS63A. If it is a probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to third probability jackpot), the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit pattern is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B (Y of step 080IWS1130A), or when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed (Y of step 080IWS1131A) and the probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to second 3 probability variable jackpot) (that is, a normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 080IWS1132A, N in step 080IWS1133A), the CPU 103 instructs the effect control CPU 120 to 1 Perform control to transmit a compulsory pattern determination designation command (step 080IWS1134A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS1130A to S1134A, in this characteristic part 080IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. When the variable display of the first special symbol, which usually results in a big win, is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously hit the jackpot. We are trying to prevent situations where small hits occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decoration symbol is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 080IWS1134A. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In this example, it is the case that the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes the probability variable big hit is being executed. In some cases, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133A). The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the process shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 080IWS1120A is determined as N, steps 080IWS1121A to S1135A are skipped, and step 080IWS1122A does not update the first variable time timer. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a probability variation big win is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small win game. is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N of step 080IWS1132A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small win game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-13 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS2010A). If the variable probability flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a variable probability storage flag indicating that the game state at the end of the variable display was the variable probability state (step 080IWS2011A). Next, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012A). If the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a high base memory flag indicating that the game state at the end of the variable display was the high base state (step 080IWS2013A).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A, in this example, it is temporarily recorded that the game state at the end of the variable display was the probability variable state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014A). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 080IWS2015A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2016A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performed the right-handed operation is in favor of the player and the hit-right indicator 26 is illuminated. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but by executing the processing of steps 080IWS67A to S73A, the first special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined to end the low probability/first KT state when starting the variable display, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014A to S2017A is executed, so that when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the low probability/first After finishing the 1KT state and shifting to the normal state (non-KT state), the right-handed indicator 26 is extinguished. However, as already explained, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1125A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/first KT state, before ending the variation display If the variable display of the second special symbol is started at the beginning of the variable display of the second special symbol, the low probability/high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the low probability/low base state (normal state ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS2018A). Incidentally, in this case, if the first compulsory design confirmation designation command is sent in step 080IWS1134A of the first special design variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the first special design is forced as the stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 080IWS2019A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating the start of the jackpot (step 080IWS2020A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 080IWS2021A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2022A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2022A and S2023A, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

In this example, after the big-hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big-hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the game ball hits to the right. You may comprise so that lighting of the indicator 26 may be started.

If the first jackpot flag is not set (N of step 080IWS2019A), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability storage flag and high base storage flag (step 080IWS2024A). In this example, the processing of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A is executed to set the variable probability storage flag and the high base storage flag, and once the game state at the end of the variable display is the variable probability state or the high base state is recorded. However, in the case of deriving and displaying a winning symbol or a small winning symbol, the process of step 080IWS2024A is executed to reset the variable probability storage flag and high base storage flag.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 080IWS2026A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 080IWS2027A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing (step 080IWS2031A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 080IWS2032A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area. there is In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as a right hitting notification. may be

In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the second special pattern, the right hitting notification and the launch promotion notice are not executed, and when the game ball wins in the first start winning hole in that state, the right hitting notice and the launch promotion notice are issued. (In this case, since it is in the state of waiting for passage through the gate, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning hole, the first special symbol variable display will not be started immediately, and will be the first reserved memory) can be configured to

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output at a low volume or small screen display). may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, the degree of recognition is high (for example, loud sound output, (Large screen display) may be configured to notify left-handed players. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the launch notification. In particular, according to the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right side of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is given in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, a left-handed notification may be given in a mode in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the game store clerk to return to the left-handed operation to the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected in the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening reaches a certain number, it may be configured to perform left-handed notification. In addition, at the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), left-handed notification is performed, and at the second start winning opening and special winning opening, more than a predetermined number It may be configured to perform left-handed notification when game balls of a specific number (for example, one) or more are detected.

In this characteristic part 080IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display being executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-14 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 080IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved memory number (step 080IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second pending memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (Step 080IWS53B), decrease the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step 080IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the second reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55B). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 080IWS55B. A set value command is also sent when

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56B). It should be noted that the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 080IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit variation (step 080IWS57B). Concretely, when the first big win flag indicating that the big win will be achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of the big win variation. When it is determined that the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit variation, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B without performing the processing after step 080IWS58B. Thus, when the variation of the second special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the first special pattern, it is forced to lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 080IWS57B, when the first special symbol is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation, a random number value (fixed value) is set as a hit determination random number, and by moving to step 080IWS59B, any Regardless of whether or not the random number for the hit determination has been obtained, the game may be forcibly lost.

Also, for example, when the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 080IWS57B, the process of steps 080IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random value (fixed value) is set as the random number for the hit determination, and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the process of the big hit change, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 080IWS58B) and executes the big hit determination module (step 080IWS59B). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 080IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big win flag indicating that a big win is to be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 080IWS61B). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the first variable probability jackpot, the second variable probability jackpot, or the third variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored ( Step 080IWS63B), and shift to step 080IWS67B.

Also, if the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 080IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 080IWS64B). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 080IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol ( step 080IWS66B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 080IWS67B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 080IWS74B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 080IWS68B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 080IWS69B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 080IWS70B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS71B). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is being shortened (step 080IWS72B ). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 080IWS73B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B.

Then, in step 080IWS74B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74B). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 080IWS74B.

In step 080IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-11. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 9-11, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process will be described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 080IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set. If neither the special figure time saving flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, FIG. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in 5(D). If the special figure time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of variations Accordingly, as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, select any one of the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIGS. 9-5 (E) to 9-6 (J) . For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / if the 1st KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) , select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, and if the 50th variation is the second Select the special symbol variation pattern table. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (if the high probability/1st KT state), the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) if the first variation The pattern table is selected, and if it is after the second variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) is selected. In addition, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) based on the fact that the lighting extension flag is set. You may do so.

(Second special symbol variation process)
FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any display result designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 080IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 080IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 080 IWS 1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 080IWS1135B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed (step 080IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display is, for example, confirmed whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a process other than the first special symbol normal process. can be determined by If the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 080IWS1127B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS1128B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129B).

When it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1125B and when it is determined as Y in step 080IWS1126B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (1st KT state), the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the first special symbol has been started before. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1127B to S1129B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/high base state (1st KT state), the variation display , the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to end the low probability/high base state. and then transition to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 080IWS1130B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set.

If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big hit symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 080IWS1131B). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 080IWS1132B). . It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big win can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second big win flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a probability variable big hit (first probability variable big hit to third probability variable big hit) (step 080IWS1133B). ). Whether or not it is a variable probability big hit (first variable probability big hit to third variable probability big win) can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of big win stored in step 080IWS63B. If it is a probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to third probability jackpot), the process is terminated as it is.

When the big hit pattern is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (Y of step 080IWS1130B), or when the small winning pattern is derived and displayed (Y of step 080IWS1131B) and the probability variable jackpot (first probability variable jackpot to second 3 probability variable jackpot) (that is, a normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 080IWS1132B, N in step 080IWS1133B), the CPU 103 instructs the effect control CPU 120 to 2 Perform control to transmit a compulsory pattern determination designation command (step 080IWS1134B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 080IWS1135B).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS1130B to S1134B, in this characteristic part 080IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. When the variable display of the second special pattern, which usually results in a big hit, is being executed, the variable display of the second special pattern is forcibly stopped, and the first special pattern and the second special pattern simultaneously hit the jackpot. We are trying to prevent situations where small hits occur. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the second special symbol variation display is forced out, the decoration symbol variation is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted at step 080IWS 1134B. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In this example, it is the case that the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the probability variable big hit is being executed. In some cases, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133B). The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the process shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 080IWS1120B is judged to be N, steps 080IWS1121B to S1135B are skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 080IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a probability variable big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small winning game. is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N of step 080IWS1132B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small win game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

By constructing as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time-saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at unintended timing when the player is absent. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first start winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( A game machine configured to provide a starting winning hole which is not a variable winning ball device, and configured to shift to a normal state via a time-saving state of a first special pattern after the end of a second KT state (small winning RUSH). , As described above, a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out. In this case, since the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol also increases. To further suppress the occurrence of a big win at an unintended timing in the absence of a player by increasing the frequency of playing, suppressing the occurrence of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the second reserved memory in the normal state. can be done.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
9-16 and 9-17 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS2010B). If the variable probability flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the variable probability storage flag (step 080IWS2011B). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012B). If the high base flag or lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag (step 080IWS2013B).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B, in this example, it is temporarily recorded that the game state at the end of the variable display was the probability variable state or the high base state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag (step 080IWS2015B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed display device 26 (step 080IWS2016B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017B).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performed the right-handed operation is in favor of the player and the hit-right indicator 26 is illuminated. Therefore, in this example, the right hitting indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but by executing the processing of steps 080IWS67B to S73B, the second special symbol is displayed as the 50th variation display. It is determined to end the low probability/first KT state when starting the variable display, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014B to S2017B is executed, so that when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the low probability/second After finishing the 1KT state and shifting to the normal state (non-KT state), the right-handed indicator 26 is extinguished. However, as already explained, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1125B to S1129B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability/first KT state, before ending the variation display If the variable display of the first special symbol is started at the beginning of the variable display of the first special symbol, the low probability/high base state is terminated at the timing of the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the low probability/low base state (normal state ).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS2018B). In this case, if the second compulsory design confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 080IWS1134B of the second special design variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the second special design is forced as a stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 080IWS2019B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 080IWS2020B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 080IWS2021B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2022B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2022B and S2023B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big win is achieved in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

If the second jackpot flag is not set (N of step 080IWS2019B), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability memory flag and high base memory flag (step 080IWS2024B). In this example, the processing of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B is executed to set the variable probability storage flag and the high base storage flag, and once the game state at the end of the variable display is the variable probability state or the high base state is recorded. However, in the case of deriving and displaying a winning symbol or a small winning symbol, the process of step 080IWS2024B is executed to reset the probability variable storage flag and high base storage flag.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2026B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 080IWS2027B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2028B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hitting indicator 26 (step 080IWS2029B), and the right for the effect control CPU 120 Control is performed to transmit a lighting start designation command (step 080IWS2030B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing (step 080IWS2031B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

By executing the processes of steps 080IWS2029B and S2030B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. Advantageously, the hit right indicator 26 is lit.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be on during the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination processing of step 080IWS2028B, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right hand indicator 26 is started in duplicate. or a right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 080IWS2032B).

(Accessory control normal processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flow chart showing a role product control normal process (step S120) in the role product control process process. In the role product control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 080IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 080IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 080IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 080IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot to "1". ' is set (step 080IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 080IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 9-19 is a flow chart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 080IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variation flag, high base flag, special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( step 080 IWS 2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 080IWS2503), and sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 080IWS2504).

In this characteristic portion 080IW, the passage gate 41 is played instead of immediately starting the jackpot game when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special pattern by executing the gate passage waiting process. On the condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21, it is configured to shift to a big hit game.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIGS. 9-20 and 9-21 are flowcharts showing the jackpot ending process (step S125) in the role control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 080IWS2200), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2202. When the big win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the big win end display timer to display time corresponding to the time (big win end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5. A value is set (step 080IWS2201), and the process ends.

At step 080IWS2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 080IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 080IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the normal jackpot (step 080IWS2204). Incidentally, whether or not it is a normal big hit can be determined by confirming the big hit type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2205), sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 080IWS2206). Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 080IWS2207). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot, the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

If it is not the normal jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the first variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS2208). It should be noted that whether or not the first probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the first variable probability big hit, the CPU 103 sets the variable probability flag and shifts to the variable probability state (step 080IWS2209), sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2210).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability storage flag is set (step 080IWS2211). If the variable probability storage flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2212). If the high base memory flag is not set (N of step 080IWS2212), that is, if the low probability/low base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. (Step 080IWS2213), and "100" is set in the high base frequency counter (Step 080IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of the low probability/low base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, when the first probability variable jackpot is obtained, the control is performed to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then, After 100 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

If the high base memory flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2212), that is, if it is in the low probability/high base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set and the state is shifted to the high base state. (Step 080IWS2215) and "50" is set in the high base frequency counter (Step 080IWS2216). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the low probability/high base state and the first probability variable jackpot is achieved, the control is performed to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then, After 50 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

If the variable probability storage flag is set (Y of step 080IWS2211), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2217). If the high base storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2217), that is, if the high probability/high base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. (Step 080IWS2218), and set "50" in the high base frequency counter (Step 080IWS2219). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of the high probability/high base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, when the first probability variable jackpot is obtained, the control is performed to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then, After 50 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

On the other hand, if the high base memory flag is not set (N of step 080IWS2217), that is, if the high probability/low base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the high probability / low base state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern becomes the first probability variable jackpot, without going through the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), It is immediately controlled to the high-probability/low base state (high-probability/second KT state).

If it is not the first variable probability jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the second variable probability jackpot (step 080IWS2220). It should be noted that whether or not the second probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the second probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag and shifts to the probability variable state (step 080IWS2221), sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2222).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability storage flag is set (step 080IWS2223). If the variable probability storage flag is not set (N of step 080 IWS2223), that is, if the low probability/low base state or low probability/high base state is set at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high base flag is set. It shifts to the high base state (step 080IWS2224) and sets "50" in the high base frequency counter (step 080IWS2225). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the derivation display of the jackpot pattern is in the low probability/low base state or the low probability/high base state, if the second probability variable jackpot occurs, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state ), and after 50 times of fluctuation display, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

On the other hand, if the variable probability storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2223), that is, if the high probability/high base state or high probability/low base state is present at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. do. Therefore, when the high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state at the time of the derivation display of the jackpot pattern, if the second probability variable jackpot occurs, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state ), the state is immediately controlled to the high-probability/low base state (high-probability/second KT state).

If it is not the second probability variation jackpot (that is, if the third probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step 080IWS2226), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. Transition (step 080IWS2227). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, when the third probability variable jackpot is achieved, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is not passed immediately. It is controlled to a low base state (high probability/second KT state).

Next, the CPU 103 resets the variable probability storage flag and high base storage flag if they are set (step 080IWS2228). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 080IWS2229).

(small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-22 is a flow chart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the role product control process process. In the small-hit end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small-hit end display timer is set (step 080IWS2300), and when the small-hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2302. When the small-hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small-hit end display timer to display corresponding to the time during which the small-hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small-hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 080IWS2301), and the process ends.

At step 080IWS2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 080IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y of step 080IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 080IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 080IWS2307).

In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the lighting of the right hand indicator 26 is started at the start of the small win game (steps 080IWS2028B-S2030B). ), by executing the processing of steps 080IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 080IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in this characteristic portion 080IW will be described. FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of game states controlled after the jackpot game for each jackpot type. Also, FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in this characteristic portion 080IW.

As shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of a normal jackpot, regardless of the game state when the jackpot symbols are derived and displayed, the game is controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (first KT state) after the jackpot game. When the variable display is finished, the low-probability/high-base state (first KT state) is finished and the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) is entered (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the first variable probability jackpot, if the low probability/low base state (normal state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, high probability/high probability after the jackpot game It is controlled to the base state (1st KT state), and after that, when 100 times of fluctuation display is completed, it is controlled from the high probability/high base state (1st KT state) to the high probability/low base state (2nd KT state) ( See step 080 IWS2209 to S2214).

Also, as shown in Figure 9-23, when the first probability variable jackpot is reached, in the low probability / high base state (1st KT state) or high probability / high base state (1KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern If there is, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (1st KT state) after the jackpot game, and after that, when the fluctuation display is completed 50 times, the high probability/high base state (1st KT state) is changed to a high probability/ It is controlled to the low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2209-S2212, S2215, S2216, S2217-S2219).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the first probability variable jackpot, if the high probability / low base state (second KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, the high probability / high base state Without going through the (1st KT state), it is controlled to the high probability/low base state (2nd KT state) immediately after the jackpot game (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2211, S2217).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the second probability variable jackpot is reached, in the low probability / low base state (1st KT state) or low probability / high base state (1KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern If there is, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (1st KT state) after the jackpot game, and after that, when the fluctuation display is completed 50 times, the high probability/high base state (1st KT state) is changed to a high probability/ It is controlled to the low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221 to S2225).

Also, as shown in Figure 9-23, when the second probability variable jackpot is reached, in the high probability / high base state (1st KT state) or high probability / low base state (2nd KT state) at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern If there is, it is controlled to the high probability/low base state (second KT state) immediately after the jackpot game without going through the high probability/high base state (first KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221 to S2223).

As shown in FIG. 9-23, when the third probability variable jackpot is reached, the jackpot game is played without passing through the high probability / high base state (first KT state) regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern. After that, it is immediately controlled to the high probability/low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2226-S2227).

In this example, when the third probability variable jackpot is achieved, the case is shown in which control is immediately made to the high probability/low base state (second KT state) regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot symbols. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, even in the case of the third probability variable jackpot, if the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern is in the low probability/low base state (normal state), once the high probability/high base state (first KT state), and then transition to the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) based on completion of a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times) of variable display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern is the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the first variable jackpot or the second Even in the event of a variable probability big hit, it is immediately controlled to a high probability/low base state (second KT state). It is possible to prevent disappointment about the end of That is, even during the high-probability/low base state (second KT state), the first special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. The probability that the high probability/low base state (second KT state (small hit RUSH)) may end due to the high determination ratio of the probability variable big win and the second probability variable big win may give the player a feeling of uneasiness. There is Therefore, in this example, in the case of high probability / low base state (second KT state), control to high probability / low base state (second KT state) immediately even if it becomes the first variable probability big hit or the second variable probability big hit It is configured so as to prevent such a disappointment from being given to the player.

In this characteristic portion 080IW, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player shoots the game ball (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the 3rd probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). , the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2226-S2227). However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the percentage of the third probability variable jackpot is only 5%, which is low. In addition, when the first variable probability big win or the second variable probability big win occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big win game ends, the state is shifted to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and then The high-probability/high-base state is maintained until a big hit occurs or the 50th or 100th variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2209-S2214, S2221-2225). In addition, when a normal big win occurs in the low probability/low base state, the transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) is made after the end of the big win game, and whether the next big win occurs or not. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

After transitioning to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this characteristic portion 080IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. to perform the shooting operation (right hitting) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the second probability variable big hit or the third probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low probability It shifts to the base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2221-S2223, S2226-S2227). In addition, when the first variable probability jackpot occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) occurs after the jackpot game ends. Then, the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2209-S2211, S2217-S2219). Further, when a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the state is shifted to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the jackpot game ends, The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times variation display is completed (see steps 080IW080IWS2205-S2207). In addition, in this example, in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), even if the fluctuation display ends 50 times or 100 times without the occurrence of the next big hit, the high probability/low base It shifts to the state (high probability/second KT state) (see steps 080IWS67A-S71A, S67B-S71B).

As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the third probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2226-S2227). In addition, when the first probability variable jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first 1KT state), and the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or 50 fluctuation displays are completed (see steps 080IWS2209-S2212, S2215, S2216, S2221-S2225). Further, when a normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207). After the normal jackpot occurs and the low-probability/high-base state is reached, if the fluctuation display ends 50 times without the next jackpot occurring, as shown in FIG. It shifts to the probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 080IWS67A-S72A, S67B-S72B).

As shown in FIG. 9-24, in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), when the first high probability big hit, the second high probability big hit, or the third high probability big hit occurs, the big hit game After the end, it shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 080IWS2209-S2211, S2217, S2221-S2223, S2226 to S2227). In addition, when a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

In addition, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the second special symbol changes at a low rate It is also possible that a display is performed. Also, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. Also, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. Also, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9-25 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 080IW. In FIG. 9-25, the processing of steps 080IWS201-S205 is the same as the processing of steps S71-S75 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first small symbol process (step 080IWS206). In this example, by executing the first small pattern process processing of step 080IWS206, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decoration pattern, the first small pattern is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second small symbol process (step 080IWS207). In this example, by executing the second small symbol process processing of step 080IWS207, the image display device 5 displays the second small symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, separately from the variable display of the decorative symbol. is executed.

In this example, the small patterns (the first small pattern and the second small pattern) are smaller in display size than the decorative patterns, and are difficult to see when compared with the decorative patterns. Further, in this example, when the pseudo-run is executed, the pseudo-running chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed once in the variable display of the decoration symbols, and then the re-variation is executed once or more to execute the variable display again. However, as for the variable display of the small symbols, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without temporary stop display or re-variation even when the pseudo-run is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, during the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where a shutter effect for displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 is executed. As for the variable display of the small symbols, it continues to be visually recognizable even during execution of the shutter effect. Also, while the shutter effect is being executed, the decoration pattern and the reserved display are in a non-display state. is executed.

FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stop symbols of the small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol). As shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when a big hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbols, the symbol combination (big hit symbol) of "333" is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbols. be. Further, when a big win is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbols, the symbol combination of "777" (big hit symbol) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "765" as the stop symbol of the first small symbol (small winning symbol). appears stopped. Further, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbols, the symbol combination of "765" (small winning symbol) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when the non-reach is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "123" (non-reach) is used as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. Lost symbol) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbols are displayed in a variable display, the symbol combination of "323" (ready-to-win symbols) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbols. Further, when the non-ready-to-win is lost in the variable display of the second special symbols, the symbol combination of "567" (non-ready-to-be-lost) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol. In addition, when the second special symbols are displayed in a variable display, the symbol combination of "767" (ready-to-win failure symbol) is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

Next, the processing of step 080IWS208 is the same as the processing of step S76 shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process (step 080IWS209). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process in step 080IWS209, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbols and the small symbols (the first and second small symbols), the special symbol In synchronism with the variable display of , the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed.

In this example, when the pseudo-run is executed, the pseudo-running chance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the variable display of the decoration symbols, and then the re-variation is performed once or more times. However, regarding the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without temporary stop display or re-variation even when the pseudo-run is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, during the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where a shutter effect for displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 is executed. As for the variable display of the fourth symbol, it continues to be visually recognizable even during execution of the shutter effect. Also, while the shutter effect is being executed, the decoration pattern and the reserved display are in a non-display state, but regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern and the reserved display are in the non-display state, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

Next, the processing of step 080IWS210 is the same as the processing of step S77 shown in FIG.

(Command analysis processing)
9-27 to 9-30 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step 080IWS205). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 080IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 080IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 080IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a set value command (step 080IWS614), the production control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 080IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 080IWS618).

If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step 080IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS620 ).

If the received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination designation command, second design determination designation command, first compulsory design determination designation command, second compulsory design determination designation command) (step 080IWS621 ), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 080IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the first compulsory determination command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the second compulsory determination command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 080IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS624). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS625).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS626). In this example, as will be described later, when not informing of hitting to the right (for example, during low probability / low base state (normal state)), the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. Then, when the right-handed notification is in progress (for example, during the KT state), the variable display of the decoration design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. Therefore, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the big hit is achieved when the right-handed notification is being performed, or even when the second special symbol is displayed variationally, the right-handed notification is not being performed. In this case (hereinafter referred to as an irregular jackpot), the variable display of the decorative symbols is not executed. If the value of the performance control process flag is a value corresponding to the special prize waiting process (Y of step 080IWS626), that is, if it is not an irregular jackpot, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS611.

If the value of the performance control process flag does not correspond to the special figure winning process (N of step 080IWS626), it means that the game is an irregular jackpot and the variable display of decorative symbols is not executed. In this case, as will be described later, since the shutter performance is being executed in the event of an irregular jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to terminate the shutter performance (step 080IWS627).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS628). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS629), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (the image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 080IWS630).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 080IWS631).

In this example, in the case of a normal jackpot that is not irregular, control is performed to start displaying the number of prize balls at the start of the jackpot game (see steps 080IWS9711 and S9712), but in the case of an irregular jackpot. may also be configured to start displaying the number of winning balls.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 080IWS632), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS633). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS634).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 080IWS624 and S633, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 080IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 080IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS638).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the production control CPU 120 sets a right-handed lighting flag indicating that the right-handed notification is performed (step 063IWS640), Control is performed to start the lighting of the striking notification LED 37 (step 080IWS641). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to replace the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 with the same pattern as the second small pattern and display it (step 080IWS642).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 080IWS643), the production control CPU 120 resets the right-handed lighting flag (step 063IWS644), and the production control CPU 120 uses the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 080IWS645).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the image display device 5 is in a state in which the jackpot symbol (in this example, a combination of "333" symbols) is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol ( step 080 IWS 646). If the jackpot pattern is not stopped and displayed as the first small pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to replace the decoration pattern displayed on the image display device 5 with the same pattern as the first small pattern and display it. (step 080IWS647). If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed as the initial symbol (in this example, the symbol "135"). combination) and display (step 080IWS648).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prize ball number counter for counting the number of prize balls (step 080IWS649).

In this example, by executing the process of step 080IWS649, the value of the number-of-balls counter is reset at the timing when the right-handed lighting end designation command is received and the left-handed operation is started. Therefore, in this example, when the right-handed lighting start designation command is first received and the right-handed operation is started, counting of the value of the prize ball number counter is started, and when the right-handed lighting end designation command is received, left-handed hitting is started. At the timing when the operation is started, the counting of the value of the number-of-balls counter is ended.

If the received effect control command is a low probability/non-KT background designation command (step 080IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, A blue background image) is displayed (step 080IWS651). Also, if the effect control CPU 120 is set, it resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 080IWS652).

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background designation command (step 080IWS653), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, A green background image) is displayed (step 080IWS654). In addition, the effect control CPU120 sets the first KT state flag (step 080IWS655), and if it is set, a high probability state flag indicating a high probability state and a second KT state flag indicating a second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 080IWS656).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 080IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, A yellow background image) is controlled (step 080IWS658). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 080IWS659), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 080IWS660).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 080IWS661), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, A red background image) is controlled (step 080IWS662). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 080IWS663), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 080IWS664).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 080IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the winning ball counter (step 080IWS666). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to update the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 080IWS667).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 080IWS668), it is checked whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS669). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the prize ball number counter (step 080IWS670). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to update the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 080IWS671).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS668 to S671, in this example, in addition to the case where the winning to the big winning opening occurs during the big winning game, the special winning opening is won in the small winning game state in the second KT state. The display of the number of prize balls is also updated when

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command, or executes a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 080IWS672 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS611.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 9-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command is received (step 080IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step 080IWS205). Then, in step 080IWS811, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the flag during right-handed lighting is set (step 080IWS812). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is performed instead of the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the first special symbol. It is checked whether it is the case (step 080IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #12 It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the first special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. In the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, if the right-handed operation is being performed during the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the second special symbol. It is checked whether it is the case (step 080IWS814). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the second variation pattern #01 to #34 It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS812 to S814, in the characteristic part 080IW, when the left-handed operation is being performed, the image display device 5 displays the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. is executed, and when the right-handed operation is being performed, the variable display of the decorative design is executed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the right-handed operation is in progress, and even if the second special symbol is varied-displayed, the left-handed operation is in progress. In that case, the variable display of the decoration pattern is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS815). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS815. Now, check whether the flag is set or not.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS816). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to restart the display of the decorative symbols and the pending display on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS817).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS815 to S817, in this example, when performing the shutter effect in the variation display of the decoration symbol of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the second If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, after the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the decorative symbol and the pending display are displayed. Display resumes. In addition, when executing the shutter performance in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is not started on the way, the second After finishing the variable display of the special pattern, the shutter effect is finished at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative pattern is started, and the display of the decorative pattern and the reserved display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern for the shutter effect (step 080IWS818). Specifically, it confirms whether or not any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is specified. If it is a variation pattern for shutter effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS819). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for erasing the decorative symbols and reserved display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS820).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 080IWS821).

When it is not the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol in step 080 IWS814, that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but in the case of right-handed notification, an irregular jackpot. A shutter effect start process 1, which is a process for starting the shutter effect of , is executed (step 080IWS822). In this example, when the irregular jackpot is achieved, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation display of the second special symbol is executed when the right-handed hitting is being notified. However, the shutter effect start processing 1 is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but when the right hit is being reported, the control to start the shutter effect is performed. This is the process to be performed.

In addition, in this example, when the 50th variation display of the low probability/high base state (1st KT state) is completed, the control is made to the low probability/low base state (normal state). Since it is in the high base state (1st KT state), the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation display, and the low probability/low base state (normal state) is controlled. However, there is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed irregularly as the 50th variable variable display and is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state). It will appear to be suddenly controlled to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state) without being executed. In this example, the shutter effect is started by executing the shutter effect start process 1 even when such an irregular fiftieth variation display is executed.

If it is not the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol in step 080 IWS813, that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, but if it is not during the notification of hitting to the right, the case of irregular jackpot A shutter effect start process 2, which is a process for starting a shutter effect, is executed (step 080IWS832). In addition, the shutter effect start process 2 is a process for performing control to start the shutter effect when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed but when the right hitting notification is not in progress.

FIG. 9-32(A) is a flow chart showing the shutter effect start process 1 (step 080IWS822). In the shutter effect start process 1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines that the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern for the big hit (first variation patterns #05, #06, #09, #12). (Step 080IWS501). If it is the first variation pattern for the jackpot (that is, if it is an irregular jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current gaming state is a low probability/high base state (step 080IWS502). Whether or not the low probability/high base state can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the high probability state flag is turned off and only the first KT state flag is set (step 080IWS655). reference). In the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal/time saving shutter effect in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS503). It should be noted that during execution of the normal/time-saving shutter effect, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

If not in the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current game state is in the high probability/high base state (step 080IWS504). It should be noted that whether or not the high probability/high base state can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag are set (see step 080IWS659). If it is in the high probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect for the high probability/high base state in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS505). It should be noted that during execution of the shutter effect for the high probability/high base state, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

If it is not the high probability/high base state, it means that the current game state is the high probability/low base state. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect for the small hit RUSH in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS506). It should be noted that during the execution of the shutter effect for small hit RUSH, it may be configured to erase the decoration pattern and the pending display.

If it is not the first variation pattern for the big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern #7, #8 (step 080IWS507). If the first variation patterns #7 and #8 (that is, if the 50th variation display in the low probability / high base state is executed), the effect control CPU 120 ends the time saving in the image display device 5 Control is performed to start the shutter effect for time (step 080IWS508). It should be noted that during the execution of the shutter effect for time saving end, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

FIG. 9-32(B) is a flow chart showing the shutter effect start process 2 (step 080IWS823). In the shutter effect start process 2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines that the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the second variation pattern for the big hit (first variation patterns #03, #06, #13, #16, #21, #28, #34) (step 080IWS511). If it is the second variation pattern for the jackpot (that is, if it is an irregular jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the normal/time-saving shutter effect (step 080IWS512 ). It should be noted that during execution of the normal/time-saving shutter effect, the decoration pattern and the pending display may be deleted.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-33 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 080IWS920). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is being performed instead of the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 selects the first small as the decorative design stop design. A combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the first small symbol determined in the symbol process (step 080IWS206) is determined (step 080IWS921). If the right-handed lighting flag is set (that is, if the right-handed hitting operation is being performed during the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 selects the second small as the decorative design stop design. A combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the second small symbol determined in the symbol process (step 080IWS207) is determined (step 080IWS922).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change display of this time is a loss (step 080IWS923). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of this time is a failure can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. can be determined by If it is not an outlier change, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS927. If it is a deviation change (Y in step 080IWS923), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggesting effect setting process for determining the presence or absence and type of a set value suggesting effect suggesting the currently set value. (Step 080 IWS 924).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS925). If the 2KT state flag is not set (that is, if the state is not the 2KT state), the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS927. If the second KT state flag is set (Y of step 080IWS925), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is a small hit RUSH suggesting that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence or absence and type of continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 080IWS926).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, when determining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect , selects a process table corresponding to the setting value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 080IWS927).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected at step 080IWS927 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 080IWS928). Next, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 080IWS929). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the LED control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

However, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed, the decorative pattern is hidden, so the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed (small patterns (first small pattern, second small pattern), The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed).

Incidentally, when it is decided to execute the setting value suggesting effect, step 080IWS929 and variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the set value suggesting effect selected in step 080IWS927. The setting value suggesting effect is executed while the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (during the deviation variation).

In addition, when execution of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is decided, according to the process table which includes the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production which is selected with step 080IWS927 step 080IWS929 and production processing during variable display (step S172) is executed. By doing so, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the variable display of the decoration pattern (during the deviation variation during the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time to the decoration design variation time timer and starts the decoration design variation time timer (step 080IWS930). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 080IWS931).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 9-34 and 9-35 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS8101), and subtracts 1 from the value of the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer (step 080IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 080IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 080IWS8104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 080IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set (step 080IWS8106). If the right-handed lighting flag is not set (that is, if the left-handed operation is performed instead of the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation designation command. It is confirmed whether or not (for example, whether or not the first fixed command reception flag is set) (step 080IWS8107). If the first symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set). (step 080IWS8108). If the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 080IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

If the right-handed lighting flag is set in step 080IWS8106 (that is, if the right-handed operation is being performed during the right-handed notification), the effect control CPU 120 issues the second symbol confirmation designation command. It is checked whether or not it has been received (for example, whether or not the second fixed command reception flag is set) (step 080IWS8111). If the second symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). (step 080IWS8112). If the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 080IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

When the first compulsory pattern confirmation designation command is not received at step 080IWS8108, or when the second compulsory design confirmation designation command is not received at step 080IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the shutter effect. (step 080IWS8115). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined, for example, by setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS8115. Now, check whether the flag is set or not.

If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display being executed is the big hit variation (step 080IWS8116). If it is not a big hit variation (that is, if it is a losing variation or a small winning variation), the effect control CPU 120 is that the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol. (Step 080IWS8117). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the decoration symbol being executed is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set. can be determined by

If the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has been started. (step 080IWS8118). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol has started can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a variation pattern command designating the second variation patterns #01 to #34 has been received. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS8122.

If the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed does not correspond to the variable display of the first special design, that is, the variable display of the decorative design being executed does not correspond to the variable display of the second special design. If so, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is started (step 080IWS8119). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol has started can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a variation pattern command designating the first variation patterns #01 to #12 has been received. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS8122.

If the variable display of the decoration symbol being executed is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Y of step 080IWS8118), or if the variable display of the second special symbol is started The variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, and when the variable display of the first special design is started (Y in step 080IWS8119), the effect control CPU 120 , the image display device 5 is controlled to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS8120). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for resuming display of decorative symbols and reserved display on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS8121).

By executing the processing of steps 080IWS8115 to S8121, in this example, when executing the shutter production in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the second When the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the shutter performance is terminated at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decoration symbol and the reserved display is resumed. In addition, when executing the shutter performance in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the way, that At the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the shutter effect is terminated, and the display of the decoration symbol and the reserved display is resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 080IWS8122). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 080IWS8123). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 080IWS8124).

In this example, as already explained, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed. During the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed, during the small winning game. , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative design variable time timer timed out in step 080IWS8122 without receiving any of the design determination designation commands means that the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS8123 and S8124, the effect is switched to the standby effect. The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. Note that the "standby effect" is, for example, a temporary stop state effect in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are shaken or slightly fluctuated.

In this example, the small patterns (first small pattern, second small pattern) and fourth pattern are also variably displayed on the image display device 5. However, the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer When the update is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the fourth symbol is also performed. Executes continuously. Then, when the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these small symbols (first small symbol, The variable display of the second small symbol) and the fourth symbol are also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is being displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 080IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9707. In this characterizing portion 080IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decoration symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set at step 080IWS9706. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the performance during the big win is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbols have been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Go to step 080IWS9707 without executing.

If the stop design display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop design display flag 2 indicating that the small winning design is displayed as the stop design of the decoration design is set. (Step 080IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9719. In this characterizing portion 080IW, when a small winning design is displayed as a stop design of the decoration design, a stop design display flag 2 is set at step 080IWS9718. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small winning. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small winning symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but since the small winning medium effect has not yet been executed, the decorative symbol stop symbol of step 080IWS9704 is displayed. Go to step 080IWS9719 without executing any process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9703). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS9703. Now, check whether the flag is set or not. If the shutter effect is being executed, the process proceeds directly to step 080IWS9705. That is, in this example, control is performed so as not to display the decoration pattern during execution of the shutter effect, so control is performed so as not to perform the process of confirming and displaying the stop pattern of the decoration pattern in step 080IWS9704.

If the shutter effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the stop symbols (losing symbol, big winning symbol, small winning symbol) of the left, middle and right decorative symbols that are being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. (step 080IWS9704). It should be noted that when the first compulsory design decision designation command and the second compulsory design decision designation command are received, and the process of replacing with the lost design is executed in steps 080IWS8109 and S8113, in step 080IWS9704, the performance control CPU 120 deviates from the design. is displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (Y in step 080IWS9705), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9706).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 080IWS9707). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9708).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9709). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS9709. Now, check whether the flag is set or not. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS9710). It should be noted that when the shutter effect is completed in step 080IWS9710, after that, it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started on the image display device 5 after the jackpot game is finished, the decorative patterns and the pending display are displayed. resumed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS9711). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 based on the current value of the counter of the number of prize balls (step 080IWS9712). .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS9713). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS9714), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 080IWS9715).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 080IWS9716).

If the jackpot pattern is not confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 080IWS9704 (N of step 080IWS9705), if the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 080IWS9704 (Y of step 080IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 080IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command is received (step 080IWS9719). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 080IWS9720).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small winning effect (step 080IWS9721). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS9722), the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 080IWS9723).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S174) during the small hit (step 080IWS9724).

In the process of step 080IWS9704, when the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern is not displayed (that is, when the losing pattern is displayed) (N in step 080IWS9705 and N in step 080IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS9725).

(Production processing during jackpot)
FIG. 9-38 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (step S176) during the big hit in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the big-hit performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not any of the big-hit end designation commands is received (for example, whether or not any of the big-hit end designation command reception flags are set). (Step 080IWS2901). If any of the jackpot end designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS2902), and according to the contents of the process data n, the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) are executed (step 080IWS2903).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS2904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 080IWS2905). That is, it switches to the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) in the process table. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 080IWS2906).

If any one of the jackpot end designation commands is received (Y in step 080IWS2901), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to end the jackpot game based on the third probability variable jackpot (step 080IWS2907). . In the case of ending the jackpot game based on the third variable probability jackpot, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2912. If it is not the case of ending the big win game based on the third variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the big win game based on the second variable probability big win (step 080IWS2908). If the jackpot game based on the second probability variable jackpot is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS2909). If the high-probability state flag is set (ie, high-probability/high-base state or high-probability/low-base state), go to step 080IWS2912. If it is not the time to end the big win game based on the second variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to end the big win game based on the first variable probability big win (step 080IWS2910). If the jackpot game based on the first variable probability jackpot is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability/low base state (second KT state)), go to step 080IWS2912.

When the jackpot game based on the third probability variable jackpot is ended (Y of step 080IWS2907), when the high probability state flag is set (Y of step 080IWS2909), or when the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911) Y), that is, when the game is controlled to the second KT state after the end of the big hit game this time, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS2912). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for erasing the decorative symbols and pending display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS2913).

Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (step 080IWS2914). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS2915), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (the image display device 5 as the performance component, the game effect lamp 9 as the performance component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the performance component) is executed (step 080IWS2916). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step 080IWS2917). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot end designation command reception flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step 080IWS2918), and ends the effect process during the big hit.

(Ending effect processing)
9-39 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 080IWS951). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 080IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N of step 080IWS952), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS953), and controls the production device (image display device 5 , game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed (step 080IWS954). For example, an effect such as displaying that the big win is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 080IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (step 080IWS957).

If the effect period measuring timer has timed out (Y of step 080IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to end the big win game based on the third probability variable big win (step 080IWS958). In the case of ending the jackpot game based on the third variable probability jackpot, the process proceeds to step 080IWS964. If it is not the case of ending the big win game based on the third variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of ending the big win game based on the second variable probability big win (step 080IWS959). If the jackpot game based on the second variable probability jackpot is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS960). If the high-probability state flag is set (ie, high-probability/high-base state or high-probability/low-base state), go to step 080IWS964. If it is not the time to end the big win game based on the second variable probability big win, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the time to end the big win game based on the first variable probability big win (step 080IWS961). If the jackpot game based on the first variable probability jackpot is to end, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS962). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability/low base state (second KT state)), go to step 080IWS964.

If it is not the time to end the big hit game based on the first variable probability big win (N of step 080IWS961) or if the second KT state flag is not set (N of step 080IWS962), that is, after the end of this big hit game When the second KT state is not controlled, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the display of the number of winning balls displayed on the image display device 5 (step 0645IWS963). However, in this case, the display of the number of prize balls is only erased, and the counter of the number of prize balls is not reset. Therefore, the game state shifts to a low probability/low base state (normal state) and a right-handed operation is performed. The value of the number-of-balls-counter is maintained until the end of

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS964). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and step 080IWS964. Now, check whether the flag is set or not. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS965). It should be noted that after the shutter effect is finished at step 080IWS965, when the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols, the display of the decorative symbols and the pending display is resumed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS966).

(Production example)
Next, the effect mode of the effect executed in this characterizing portion 080IW will be described. First, the display mode of the right hitting notification will be described. FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the notification of hitting to the right. In this example, regardless of whether the big win is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol or the big win is achieved by the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, when the jackpot game is in progress. 9-40(1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) turns on the right-handed indicator 26 (see steps 080IWS2022A and S2022B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40(1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed hit display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 080IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specific , the right-handed indicator 26 is lit by the CPU 103 (see step 080IWS2029B). Also, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit by the effect control CPU 120 (steps 080IWS2030B, S641) . However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 9-40(2), the display of the right hitting display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not performed.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hitting notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right hitting display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

Next, the effect mode of the shutter effect will be described. FIG. 9-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the shutter effect. In addition, in FIG. 9-41, the effect screen transitions in the order of (T1), (T2), (T3), and so on. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a decorative design display area 080IW010 for displaying the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and the left, middle, and right first small design. A first small pattern display area 080IW011 and a second small pattern display area 080IW012 for displaying second small patterns on the left, middle and right are provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a fourth pattern display area 080IW013 for displaying a fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a fourth pattern display for displaying a fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. A region 080IW014 is provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 080IW015 for displaying a first reserved display corresponding to the first reserved memory and a second reserved display area for displaying a second reserved display corresponding to the second reserved memory. 2 reserved storage display areas 080IW016 are provided.

In this example, the fourth pattern display area 080IW013, 014 provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 shows a case where the fourth pattern is displayed in a variable manner. do not have. For example, a luminous body such as an LED provided separately from the image display device 5 may be flashed, turned on, or turned off to perform light emission display, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-41 (T1), in the low-probability/high-base state (first KT state), when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, correspondingly, the second small symbol display area 080IW012 , the variable display of the left, middle, and right second small patterns is started, and the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is started in the decorative design display area 080IW010, and the variable display of the fourth design is started in the fourth design display area 080IW014. is started. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T2), the second small symbol stop symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010. is fixedly displayed, and the fourth stopped pattern is fixedly displayed in the fourth pattern display area 080IW014. In addition, in FIG. 9-41 (T2), the second small symbol, the decorative symbol, and the stopped symbol of the fourth symbol are displayed as fixed symbols.

Next, it is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation (50th variation) of the low probability/high base state (1st KT state). In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), on the image display device 5, based on the reception of the variation pattern command specifying the variation pattern including the shutter effect, the character display of "preparing for the big hit" is displayed. The shutter effect image 080IW017 including is displayed so as to close from the left and right, thereby starting the shutter effect (see step 080IWS819). In this example, it is assumed that the second variation pattern #16 is determined based on the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, which becomes the big hit variation as the final variation.

Further, when the shutter effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the left, middle and right decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display area 080IW010 are erased, and the first reserved memory display area 080IW015 and the second The pending display displayed in the pending storage display area 080IW016 is erased (see step 080IWS820). However, even if the shutter effect is started and the decoration pattern is erased, the display of the second small pattern in the second small pattern display area 080IW012 is continued, and the second small pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3). In the region 080IW012, the variable display of the left, middle and right second small symbols is started. Further, the display of the fourth pattern in the fourth pattern display area 080IW014 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the variable display of the fourth pattern is started in the fourth pattern display area 080IW014.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T4), the shutter effect is continuously executed while the second small pattern and the fourth small pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is confirmed and displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the second small symbol in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014. Stop symbols of 4 symbols are confirmed and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), in the image display device 5, a right-handed shot image 080IW018 prompting a right-handed operation of performing a shooting operation aimed at the right side of the game area is displayed superimposed on the shutter effect image 080IW017. be. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the image display device 5 superimposes a gate passage promotion image 080IW019 on the right-handed image 080IW018 to prompt the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 .

Next, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. The shutter effect is completed by moving from the center to the left and right to be hidden and hidden (see step 080IWS9710). Then, when the shutter effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T7), a character display such as "Jumping" and the number of rounds are displayed, and the number of prize balls display 080IW020 is displayed. Thus, an effect is executed such that a big win game is started immediately after the shutter effect is finished. After that, when the big win game is finished and the variable display of the next decorative pattern is started, the display of the decorative pattern and the reserved display is resumed.

In the example shown in Fig. 9-41, the final variation (50th variation) in the low probability / high base state (1st KT state) is a big hit variation, but the final variation is a losing variation or a small hit Even in the case of variation, the shutter effect is executed in the same manner as in FIGS. 9-41 (T3) and (T4). Then, after the fluctuation time is over, when the variable display of the next decoration pattern is started, the shutter effect is finished and the display of the decoration pattern and the reserved display is resumed (see steps 080IWS816, S817). However, when executing the shutter production in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, if the variation display of the second special symbol is started on the way, that At the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the shutter performance is ended, and the display of the decorative symbol and the reserved display is resumed. In addition, when executing the shutter performance in the variation display of the decoration pattern of the loss variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the way, that At the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the shutter effect is ended, and the display of the decoration symbol and the pending display is resumed (see steps 080IWS8115 to S8121).

Next, the mode of switching the display of decorative patterns will be described. FIGS. 9-42 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the mode of switching the display of decorative patterns. Although not shown in FIGS. 9-42, the image display device 5 is provided with a fourth pattern display area for displaying the fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is also displayed (see FIG. 9-42). 9-41).

In this example, during a period in which the gaming state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) and a left-handed operation is performed, left, middle, right in the decorative design display area 080IW010 corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. is displayed. Therefore, when the game state is a low probability / low base state (normal state), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a big hit, when the big hit symbol is stopped, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (1) As shown, in the first small symbol display area 080IW011, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol, and in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010, the first special symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. The same big winning pattern as the one small pattern is fixedly displayed. After that, when the jackpot game is started, the decoration pattern display area 080IW010 is switched to the display corresponding to the second special pattern (see step 080IWS642), and the jackpot game is finished. Then, for example, when the state is shifted to the second KT state, as shown in the right column of FIG. The same pattern as the second small pattern displayed in the pattern display area 080IW012 is displayed.

Incidentally, in this example, when the game is controlled to the second KT state when ending the jackpot game, a shutter performance is executed (see step 080IWS2912). In this case, for example, in the image display device 5, instead of the character display of "preparing for the big hit" in FIGS. It is only necessary to execute an effect in such a manner as to close the .

In addition, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (2) shows the display state of decorative symbols immediately before the end of the final variation (50th variation) in the low-probability/high-base state. In this case, since the right-handed operation is performed, as shown in the left column of FIG. The same pattern as the second small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 080IW012 is displayed. Next, when the final variation (50th variation) is completed and the state shifts to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the state shifts to a state in which a left-handed operation is performed. The display is switched to the same pattern as the first small pattern displayed in the first small pattern display area 080IW011 as a decoration pattern corresponding to the pattern (see step 080IWS647).

However, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), if the variation display of the first special symbol executed last time accidentally results in a big hit, it is displayed in the first small symbol display area 080IW011. There is a case where the first small pattern remains the big hit pattern. In such a case, if the decoration pattern is switched to the same pattern as the first small pattern as it is, the player may misunderstand that a big win has occurred even though a big win has not occurred. . Therefore, in this example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), when the final variation (50th variation) in the low-probability/high-base state is completed, the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first small symbol. When it is in the state of being set, the decorative pattern is not switched to the same pattern as the first small pattern, but is switched to the initial appearance (in this example, a combination of "135" symbols). (see step 080IWS648).

In addition, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3) is controlled to a high probability state or a high base state, and when the right hitting operation is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. A case of a big hit is shown. In this case, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3), the jackpot pattern is fixedly displayed as the stop pattern of the second small pattern in the second small pattern display area 080IW012. In the decorative design display area 080IW010, the same jackpot design as the second small design is confirmed and displayed as the stop design of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design. After that, since the state in which the right-handed operation is performed continues, the state in which the same pattern as the second small pattern is displayed as the decoration pattern continues, and even when the big win game ends, the state shown in FIG. 9-42 ( As shown in the right column of 3), in the decorative design display area 080IW010, the same design as the second small design displayed in the second small design display area 080IW012 continues as a decorative design corresponding to the second special design. displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-42, a case is shown in which the small pattern on the sub-symbol side of the first small pattern and the second small pattern is always displayed. I can't limit it. For example, among the first and second small symbols, the sub-symbol side small symbol need not always be displayed, and may be displayed only during the sub-symbol fixing period. With such a configuration, by omitting the display of unnecessary information during the fluctuation of the main pattern of the first small pattern and the second small pattern, the effect display corresponding to the main pattern (ready-to-win effect, etc.). It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to.

In this example, both the decoration pattern and the small patterns (the first small pattern and the second small pattern) start to be changed and displayed based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. In addition, regarding the decorative pattern, it will be in a temporary stop state (shaking fluctuation state) before the end of the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern, and the design confirmation designation command (first design confirmation designation command, second design confirmation designation command, first It will be in a fixed stop state based on the reception of the compulsory pattern confirmation designation command, the second compulsory design confirmation designation command). On the other hand, the small symbols enter a fixed stop state based on the reception of the symbol fix designation command without passing through the temporary stop state (shaking fluctuation state). In addition, as for the decorative symbols, it is possible to execute a resurrection effect to change the variable display result through a temporary stop state of out of reach.

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the shutter effect executed in the irregular jackpot or the 50th variation of the low probability/high base state. FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the shutter effect executed in the irregular jackpot or the 50th variation of the low probability/high base state. In addition, in FIG. 9-43, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Note that the example shown in FIG. 9-43 shows, as an example, the effect mode of the shutter effect executed at the 50th variation in the low-probability/high-base state.

As shown in FIG. 9-43(A), in the low-probability/high-base state, for example, a character display 080IW031 such as "chance time" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an instruction to hit right is displayed. Right hitting display 080IW032 is displayed. Since it is in the middle of informing of hitting to the right, the image display device 5 performs the variable display of the decoration design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design.

Next, it is assumed that the fiftieth variation display in the low probability/high base state is started, and that the fiftieth variation display is the first special symbol variation display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-43(B), an image is displayed on the image display device 5 as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 were closed, and the decorative patterns on the left, middle, and right sides are hidden, and a shutter effect is produced. is started (see step 080IWS508). Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually opened, and a display is performed in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are gradually visible. will be

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-43(G), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are completely opened, and left, middle, and right decoration patterns are completely visible, and the shutter effect is completed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43(G), the character display 080IW035 such as "normal mode" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 080IW036 such as "Please return to left-handed shooting" is displayed. , the return to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) is notified, and a display prompting a left-handed operation is performed.

FIG. 9-44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image data used in the shutter effect. Also, FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of displaying a still image used in the shutter effect. In this example, when starting the shutter effect, instead of reproducing moving image data in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are gradually closed from above and below, an initial image shown in FIG. A still image is displayed based on the still image data in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are closed. In this case, in this example, the effect image 080IW037 is displayed near the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034, as shown in FIGS. 9-43(B) and 9-44(A). Further, when the still image is displayed, control is performed so that the still image is vertically vibrated in small increments according to the passage of time T, as shown in FIGS. 9-45(A) to (C). By displaying in this way, in this example, a still image is actually displayed, but from the player's point of view, the impression is given as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 were closed instantly. controlling.

In this example, by performing control to display still images as shown in FIGS. The image data production process can be kept at a low cost compared to the case of reproducing a simple moving image, and the display screen of the image display device 5 can be instantly covered, so that the decoration pattern can be quickly hidden.

In this example, the effect image 080IW037 is displayed, or the still image is vertically vibrated in small increments to make it appear as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 were closed instantaneously. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when displaying a still image, outputting a sound effect that sounds like the shutters are closed, or displaying the vibration of the characters and operation buttons, it is possible to make it look as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 were closed instantly. can be configured to

Then, after displaying the still image shown in FIG. 9-44(A), by reproducing the moving image data shown in FIGS. 9-44(B) to (C), the ) is displayed such that the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are gradually opened.

In this example, a static image is used to instantly hide the decorative pattern for the effect of closing the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034, while a moving image is played for the effect of opening the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034. However, when the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are opened, the fanfare effect and the effect of waiting for passage through the gate are executed, and the variable display of the decoration pattern is already not displayed. Even if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually opened, there is no possibility of misidentifying the variable display of the decoration pattern.

FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram showing types of images displayed in the shutter effect. In this example, the shutter performance shown in FIG. 9-43 is for the case where an irregular jackpot occurs or the 50th variation display in the low probability/high base state is executed. 9-46(A), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters “END” are displayed to perform the shutter effect (time saving Shutter effect for end time) is executed (see step 080IWS508). In addition, if an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the low probability/low base state (normal state) or in the low probability/high base state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B). The upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "Intense Heat Standby" are displayed, and the shutter effect (normal/time-saving shutter effect) is executed (see steps 080IWS503, S512). Also, if an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 containing numbers as shown in FIG. 9-46(C). is displayed, and a shutter effect (shutter effect for a small hit RUSH) accompanied by a count display is executed (see step 080IWS506).

Although not shown in FIG. 9-46, if an irregular jackpot occurs while the gaming state is in the high probability/high base state, a shutter effect for the high probability/high base state is performed. executed. In this case, for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including characters such as "Lowding" may be displayed to execute the shutter effect.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of one special symbol results in a small hit during the variable display of the other special symbol.

During the variable display of the first special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, the first 9-47 (A), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. The variable display continues. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, Step 080 (see Y in IWS1133A).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol The variable display of is also forced to be displayed as a missing symbol (N of step 080IWS1133A, see step 080IWS1134A).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, (See step 080 IWS1132A N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, the first 9-47 (D), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. The variable display continues. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See Y in step 080IWS1133B).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (E), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol The variable display of is also forced to stop display with a missing symbol (N of step 080IWS1133B, refer to step 080IWS1134B).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (F), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, Step 080 See N in IWS1132B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol will be described.

(Modification 1)
9-48 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 9-48, the processing of steps 080IWS1120A to S1132A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-12, but in modification 1, the judgment processing of step 080IWS1133A shown in FIG. 9-12 does not exist. .

In the modified example 1, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1134A as it is, and transmits the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (step 080IWS1134A). 9-48, the processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-12.

FIG. 9-49 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 9-49, the processing of steps 080IWS1120B to S1132B are the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15, but in modification 1, the determination processing of step 080IWS1133B shown in FIG. 9-15 does not exist. .

In the modification 1, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1134B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 080IWS1134B). 9-49, the processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15.

FIG. 9-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 1 results in a small win in the variable display of the other special symbol.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in Fig. 9-50(A), when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Stopped display (N of step 080IWS1132A, see step 080IWS1134A).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, Step 080 (See N in IWS1132A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in Fig. 9-50(C), when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Stopped display (N of step 080IWS1132B, see step 080IWS1134B).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (D), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, Step 080 See N in IWS1132B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 9-51 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-51, the processes of steps 080IWS1120A to S1131A are the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 080IWS1132C.

In modification 2, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). In addition, in FIG. 9-51, the processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-12.

FIG. 9-52 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-52, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1131B are the same as those shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 080IWS1132D.

In the modification 2, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). In addition, in FIG. 9-52, the processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15.

FIG. 9-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in FIG. 9-53(A), the first special symbol continues to be varied and displayed even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (steps 080IWS1120A, (See Y in step 080IWS1132C).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B), When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forced to be stopped and displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 080IWS1132C, see step 080IWS1134A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in FIG. 9-53(C), the second special symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the variation is a big hit that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See Y in step 080IWS1132D).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (D), When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 080IWS1132D, see step 080IWS1134B).

In addition, as a control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, in addition to those shown in the first and second modifications, for example, losing During the variable display of the first special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, it is forced to come off and stop, while the first special symbol to be a small winning is displayed during the variable display. In the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is lost and fluctuates. It may be constructed so as to be stopped forcibly in either small hit variation or big hit variation. With such a configuration, in this example, when 50 fluctuation displays in the low-probability/high-base state are completed, the transition to the low-probability/low-base state is made (see FIG. 9-24). When 1 to 4 second reserved memories are accumulated when changing to a low probability/low base state after ending the variable display, and if there is a second reserved memory that becomes a big hit among them, the game is forced to lose and stop. Thus, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second start winning port is easily started to win. It is also possible to have a capture method in which the first start winning opening is started to win and the first special symbol is displayed variably, while the second special symbol is variably displayed by the start winning. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various aspects can be conceived as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 9-47) is shown, different controls are possible. FIG. 9-54 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, in the modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 9-12. In FIG. 9-54, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1130B are the same as those shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, if the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big hit symbol (N of step 080IWS1130B), the CPU 103 terminates the process as it is.

FIG. 9-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9-55 (A) and (C), in the modification 3, during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, similarly to FIGS. 9-47 (A) and (C). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (D) and (F), during the fluctuation display of the second special pattern that becomes a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, the small hit pattern stops in the fluctuation display of the first special pattern. When it is displayed, like FIGS. 9-47 (D) and (F), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-55(B), in the modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol. Similarly to FIG. 9-47(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-55(E), in the modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. 9-47(E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-55, in modification 3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is forced with the missing symbol. Stop display control is different.

In addition, in the modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the game is forcibly lost and stopped, while the normal big hit is achieved. While the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display is continued when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol. do not have. For example, conversely, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the variable display is continued while the normal big win is performed. It may be constructed such that when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the machine is forced to come off and stop. Also, for example, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big hit or a normal big hit), the forced loss is performed. On the other hand, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big win or a normal big win), it fluctuates. The display may be configured to continue. As such, in some form, the control for the forced dropout stop may be different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 9-56 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 9-56, the processing of steps 080IWS1120A-S1133A are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-12.

In modification 4, in step 080IWS1133A, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in any of the first, second, and third probability variable jackpots (that is, the normal jackpot) is being executed , the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if it is in the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory design confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). The processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-12.

In the fourth modification, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, by executing the determination process of step 080IWS1131A, The variable display of the first special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the first special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is not in the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 9-57 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-57, the processing of steps 080IWS1120B-S1133B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-15.

In modification 4, in step 080IWS1133B, when the variable display of the first special symbol that does not result in any of the first probability variable jackpot, the second probability variable jackpot, and the third probability variable jackpot (that is, the normal jackpot) is being executed , the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 080IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). The processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-15.

In modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 080IWS1131B, during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even during variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, if the probability variable state is not in effect, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that, in the modification 4, whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not the probability variation state) is forcibly removed depending on whether the stop display in the pattern was shown, but only such an aspect can't For example, depending on whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set, it may be configured to forcibly perform stop display control with a lost design. Further, for example, only when the high probability/low base state (high probability flag is ON, high base flag is OFF), control may be performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols. As long as it is configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols according to the current game state in some form.

In addition, as described above, in the case of performing control to forcibly stop and display the losing pattern only in the high probability/low base state, the variable display of one identification information prevents the normal big hit, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

(Modification 5)
Also, in this example, depending on whether it is a period for performing a left-handed operation or a period for performing a right-handed operation, a decorative design is displayed in correspondence with the first special design or in correspondence with the second special design. While switching whether to display the decoration pattern, both the first small pattern and the second small pattern are displayed continuously. It may be configured to switch between displaying the first small pattern and displaying the second small pattern depending on the presence.

FIG. 9-58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the mode of switching display of decorative symbols in Modification 5. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 9-58, the mode of switching the decorative patterns is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 9-42. In this example, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-58 (1) and the right column of FIG. 9-58 (2), it is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), and a state of performing a left-handed operation In this case, the second small pattern display area 080IW012 is erased based on the reception of the right-handed lighting end designation command, and only the display of the first small pattern in the first small pattern display area 080IW011 is displayed. state can be switched. In addition, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-58 (1), the left column of FIG. 9-58 (2), and the left column of FIG. When the hitting operation is to be performed, the first small pattern display area 080IW011 is erased and the second small pattern is displayed in the second small pattern display area 080IW012 based on the reception of the right-hand lighting start designation command. is switched to a state in which only is displayed.

(Modification 6)
In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted, but the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted. You may FIG. 9-59 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop processing in Modification 6. As shown in FIG. In modification 6, the processes of steps 080IWS2010A to S2027A are the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-13.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2028A). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2030A). The processing of steps 080IWS2031A-S2032A is the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-13.

In addition, in the sixth modification, since the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted even when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit is achieved, when the small hit game is finished, the figure In the small hit end process shown in 9-22, a process similar to that of step 080IWS2307 is executed and a right-handed lighting end designation command is transmitted.

FIG. 9-60 is a flow chart showing a specific example of command analysis processing (step 080IWS205) in the sixth modification. It should be noted that in Modification 6, the processing of steps 080IWS611 to S639, S640 to S643, and S644 to S672 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-30.

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the production control CPU 120 is controlled to a small winning game state by confirming and displaying a small winning symbol in the variable display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not there is a case (step 080IWS639X). Whether or not the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol and is controlled to the small winning game state is determined, for example, by receiving the small winning start designation command and the second special symbol. It can be determined by confirming whether or not a small winning symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of one small symbol. If the small winning design is confirmed and displayed in the variable display of the first special design and is controlled to the small winning game state (Y of step 080IWS639X), the step is performed without executing the processing of steps 080IWS640 to S642. Go to 080IWS611.

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 080IWS643), the production control CPU 120 is controlled to a small winning game state by confirming and displaying a small winning symbol in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not there is a case (step 080IWS643X). If the small winning design is confirmed and displayed in the variable display of the first special design and is controlled to the small winning game state (Y of step 080IWS643X), the steps are performed without executing the processing of steps 080IWS644 to S649. Go to 080IWS611.

According to the modification 6, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small hit, the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the side of the effect control CPU 120. is executed to determine that it is a case of a small hit, and control is performed so as not to perform right-handed notification, and whether the decoration pattern is displayed in correspondence with the first special pattern or the second special pattern. is controlled so as not to switch

As described above, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. is executable. In addition, it is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a non-special state (for example, a low It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than the probability/low base state (normal state). Further, as the special state, control is possible between a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to control to the second special state based on what has been done (for example, the third probability variable jackpot, completion of 50 or 100 times of variable display in the high probability/high base state (first KT state)) be. Further, when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information when being controlled to the non-special state, based on the variable display of the second identification information when being controlled to the second special state than when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first probability variable jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot during the high probability/low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled to a high probability/low base state (2nd KT state), whereas the first and second probability variable jackpots occur during the low probability/low base state (normal state). is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state (first KT state), and then to a high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) after completion of 50 or 100 times of fluctuation display). Therefore, when it is configured to be controllable to the special state, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

In particular, in this example, since the low probability/low base state (normal state) is during the left-handed operation period, it is normal for a big hit to occur in the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the big win occurs during the low probability/low base state (normal state) when the second reserved memory remaining after the high probability/low base state (second KT state) ends becomes the big win. or when a big hit occurs due to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol by intentionally performing a right-handed operation during the low-probability/low-base state (normal state). is. In this example, if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the low probability/low base state (normal state) and a big hit is achieved, the high probability/ By providing a case of being controlled in a low base state (second KT state), a penalty is given to a strategic operation such as a right-handed operation in such a normal state, while reducing interest in the game. so that it can be suppressed.

In this example, as a specific example of the case where "predetermined conditions are unlikely to be satisfied", the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) ( In other words, high probability 0 times), while in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the fluctuation display ends 50 times or 100 times, it will enter the high probability / low base state (second KT state) Although the case where it is controlled (that is, 50 times or 100 times at the high base frequency) has been shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if a big hit occurs in the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state), it is temporarily controlled to the high-probability/high-base state (first KT state), and a relatively small number of times, 10 or 30 times, is displayed. When finished, it is controlled to a high probability / low base state (2nd KT state), whereas in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the relatively large number of 50 or 100 times of fluctuation display is completed It may be configured to be controlled to a high probability/low base state (second KT state). In such a way, the time to transition to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) is higher in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state) than in the high-probability/low base state (second KT state). It is only necessary to make the transition to the high-probability/low base state (second KT state) difficult by, for example, applying .

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, even in the low probability / high base state and high probability / high base state, when the first probability variable big hit or the second probability variable big hit occurs, 50 times of fluctuation display is controlled to a high-probability/low-base state (second KT state) after the end of , so that the probability/low-base is higher than when the first variable-probability big hit or the second variable-probability big hit occurs during the high-probability/low-base state. A case is shown in which the transition to the state (second KT state) is made difficult, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the low-probability/high-base state, it is also during the right-handed operation period and the penalty element is low, so the high-probability/low-base state ( It may be configured to control to the second KT state).

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information while being controlled to the second special state, when controlled to the non-special state, the first 1. The predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the control is performed to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first When a variable probability big hit or a second variable probability big hit occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and after that, when the variable display is completed 50 times or 100 times, the high probability / low base state (1st 2KT state), while the high probability / low base state (second KT state) immediately high probability / low base state (second KT state), and as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection ratio of the first variable probability big hit and the second variable probability big win is high). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest.

In particular, immediately after the transition from the low probability / low base state (normal state) to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), if the first special symbol is displayed again and the big hit is made, the first special symbol will be displayed at a high rate. There are cases where it becomes a variable probability big hit or a second variable probability big hit, and in this case, like a penalty, end the high probability / low base state (2nd KT state) and move to the high probability / high base state (1st KT state). Otherwise, the player may be disappointed. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first high probability variable jackpot or the second probability variable jackpot immediately high probability / low base state (second KT state) to prevent such disappointment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the irregular jackpot.

In this example, during the high probability/low base state (2nd KT state), even if the first variable probability big hit or the second variable probability big hit is immediately controlled to the high probability/low base state (2nd KT state), It is not limited to such aspects. For example, during the high probability / low base state (2nd KT state), when the 1st probability variable jackpot or the 2nd probability variable jackpot is reached, when the relatively small number of times of 10 or 30 times of fluctuation display is completed, the high probability / low base It may be configured so as to be controlled to the state (second KT state), and it is sufficient if it is configured in some form such that "predetermined conditions are likely to be satisfied".

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Also, when the set value is set to a low advantage (for example, set value "1"), the predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the set value is set to a high advantage. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability, so that a jackpot hit occurs in the high-probability/high-base state (first KT state). It is easy to perform variable display up to 100 times or 100 times, and it is easy to shift to the high-probability/low-base state (second KT state). Therefore, even when the advantage is set to a low set value, it is possible to create expectations and improve interest in the game.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when executing the 50th variation display in the low probability/high base state), a predetermined display ( For example, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that temporarily makes the left, middle, and right decorative patterns difficult to see. As a special effect, a specific image (for example, a static image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43(B) and 9-44(A) are closed) is displayed to make the predetermined display difficult to see. 9-43 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 9-44 (B) and (C). A moving image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 are gradually opened) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost required for special effects.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when executing the 50th variation display in the low probability/high base state), a specific image ( For example, a static image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that temporarily makes it difficult to see. In addition, it is possible to display a plurality of types of specific images (for example, static images shown in FIGS. 9-46 (A) to (C)), and different types of specific images can be displayed according to the game state when controlled in an advantageous state. (For example, when the shutter effect is executed in the 50th variation display of the low probability / high base state, the upper and lower including the letters “END” as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A) Shutters 080IW033, 034 are displayed, and when an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is in the low probability/low base state (normal state) or in the low probability/high base state, the process shown in FIG. 9-46 ( As shown in B), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "Intense heat waiting" are displayed, and when the game state is a high probability/low base state (second KT state), an irregular big win occurs. 9-46(C), upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including numbers are displayed). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost required for the special presentation.

Also, for example, especially when a normal jackpot occurs during a high probability/high base state or a high probability/low base state, the variable probability state ends or the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends. However, as shown in FIG. 9-46(C), a shutter effect accompanied by a count display or a shutter effect including characters such as "Lowding" is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively agitated.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, high probability / low base state (second KT state)). Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is likely to be given due to a special state, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to variably display the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variably display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Also, in response to the transition of the game state, a special image (for example, shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in the display area where the variable display of the effect identification information is executed, thereby reducing the visibility of the effect identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incompatibility between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of transition of the game state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of variable display of the second identification information is increased compared to a non-predetermined state (for example, a low base state). , a special effect (for example, shutter effect image 080IW017 shown in FIG. 9-41) for displaying a special image (for example, shutter effect image 080IW017 shown in FIG. 9-41) for notifying that the game state is shifted with high visibility when the predetermined state is shifted to the non-predetermined state ( For example, a shutter effect) is executed, and non-display control of the effect identification information is performed when a special effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the game state when shifting from the predetermined state to the non-predetermined state, and reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, a high probability / low base state (second KT state)). In addition, transition performance (for example, shutter performance) can be executed when the special state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, and non-display control of the performance identification information is performed when the transition performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incompatibility between the performance identification information and the game state when the game is controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state, and to reduce the processing load related to the display of the performance identification information.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, the non-display control of the effect identification information is started corresponding to the transition of the game state, and the effect is produced based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol). Ends hiding control of identification information. Therefore, it is possible to display the effect identification information again while preventing the occurrence of discomfort between the effect identification information and the game state.

In this example, the predetermined condition is a case where display of decorative symbols and reserved display is resumed based on the start of variable display of the next decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) from the start of non-display of the decoration pattern and the reserved display, the display of the decorative pattern and the reserved display is resumed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. may be configured.

In addition, according to the present characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to store information about the variable display as a hold memory, display the hold display corresponding to the hold memory, and hide the hold display during non-display control of the effect identification information. Display status. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the pending display in addition to the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to execute variable display of reduced identification information (for example, small symbols (first small pattern, second small pattern)) in which the effect identification information is reduced, and the effect identification information The reduced identification information is displayed regardless of whether the non-display control of is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game situation even during non-display control of the effect identification information.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (eg, a big win pattern), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, a big win game state). In addition, when ending the non-display control of the effect identification information, display the combination of the effect identification information of the display result different from the specific display result (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), The decorative pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is misunderstood as being controlled in an advantageous state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, after executing the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, the specific condition (for example, transition to the probability variable state or the high base state) is established. Based on this, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, execution of the final variation (for example, the 50th variation) in a low-probability/high-base state) after the establishment of the specific condition, corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information Variable display of the performance identification information is executed. Also, a display result different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when the specific condition is satisfied corresponds to the variable display of the first identification information when the special condition is satisfied. The display result of the variable display of the effect identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decoration pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of game states (for example, jackpot game state, variable probability state, high base state). In addition, it is possible to perform variable display of the first special identification information (eg, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second special identification information (eg, the second special symbol), and the variable display of the first special identification information A first variable effect display for executing variable display of the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) correspondingly, and a second variable effect for executing the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. Either display can be executed as a variable display. Further, based on the reception of state transition information (for example, right-handed lighting start designation command, right-handed lighting end designation command) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display are changed. Switch the variable display from one of them to the other (for example, switch to the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, and receive the right-handed lighting end designation command Based on this, the display is switched to the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern). Therefore, it is possible to switch the variable display from one of the first variable effect display and the second variable display to the other based on the reception of the state transition information, so that the processing load of controlling the effect can be reduced. can.

For example, as shown in this example, in a gaming machine configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is necessary to monitor both the variation state of the first special symbol and the variation state of the second special symbol in order to switch whether the decoration symbol is displayed correspondingly, and the processing load on the CPU 120 side for effect control is increased. There is a possibility that the display of decorative patterns cannot be switched smoothly. Therefore, in this example, by configuring to switch the display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command transmitted in relation to the change in the game state, such In this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an unnecessary processing load is imposed on the effect control CPU 120 side, and to smoothly switch the display of decorative patterns.

In this example, the case of switching the display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command as the state transition information is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when a background specifying command capable of specifying the game state can be transmitted, the game state may be determined based on the reception of the background specifying command as the state transition information and the display of the decoration pattern may be switched. good. Further, for example, when a game state specifying command capable of specifying the game state itself can be transmitted, the game state is determined based on the reception of the game state specifying command as the state transition information, and the display of the decoration pattern is switched. It may be configured as Various modes are conceivable as such state transition information.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load particularly when the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel.

In this example, a case is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the winning order of the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole, this characteristic part 080IW configuration may be applied. Further, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 080IW may be applied.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from the advantageous state. , can be controlled to a special state (for example, high-probability/low-base state (second KT state)) in which game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is likely to be given due to a special state, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification 5 of the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, the small pattern (first small pattern, second small pattern)) in which the effect identification information is reduced. , corresponding to the first reduced variable display for executing the variable display of the reduced identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information based on the reception of the state transition information, and the variable display of the second special identification information. Then, the variable display is switched from one to the other of the second reduced variable display for performing variable display of the reduced identification information (for example, see FIG. 9-58). Therefore, by making it possible to switch the variable display of the reduced identification information in accordance with the state transition information, the processing load of the effect control can be further reduced.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 080IW, the special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) whose visibility is lower than the effect identification information is variably displayed by a variable display mode different from the effect identification information, and the state transition information is displayed. variable display of the special identification information regardless of whether or not the Therefore, even if the variable display of the effect identification information is switched, it is possible to recognize the game situation.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, as the state transition information, it is a situation in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is operated to a predetermined area (for example, a right area of the game area) of the game area. switching the variable display from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other based on the reception of predetermined operation information (for example, right-handed lighting start designation command) indicating that Switching to the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command). Therefore, the information indicating the state of the game medium shooting operation and the information corresponding to the transition of the game state can be used together, and the information storage area can be reduced.

In addition, according to this characterizing part 080IW, the given game value (for example, the number of winning balls) is totaled. Also, based on the reception of the predetermined operation information, totaling of the game value is started, and an operation of shooting the game medium to a specific area other than the predetermined area of the game area (for example, a left area of the game area) is performed. Computation of the game value is ended based on the reception of the specific operation information (for example, right-handed lighting end designation command) indicating the situation. Therefore, it is possible to manage the tally of the game value with the reception of the information indicating the situation of the shooting operation of the game medium as a trigger.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, a special image (for example, a shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in the display area where the variable display of the effect identification information is executed in response to the transition of the game state, and the effect identification information is visually recognized. reduce sexuality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the game state at the timing of transition of the game state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, after the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information, the specific condition (for example, transition to the probability variable state or the high base state) is established. Based on that, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. In addition, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final variation (for example, the 50th variation) in the low probability / high base state) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. to execute the variable display of the effect identification information. Further, the variable display of the first special identification information when the special condition is satisfied is different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information when the specific condition is satisfied. (For example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decoration pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game situation is misunderstood.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of variable display of the second special identification information is increased compared to the non-predetermined state. Therefore, by providing a predetermined state in which the execution frequency of variable display of the second special identification information is increased, interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from the advantageous state. , state transition information (for example, right-handed lighting start designation command, right-handed lighting end designation command) is transmitted. Also, when the non-predetermined state is controlled to a special state, the state transition information is not transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of switching control of variable display of the effect identification information, and reduce the processing load of the effect control.

Further, according to the modification 6 of the characteristic part 080IW, the state transition information is transmitted even when the non-predetermined state is controlled to the special state. Further, even if the state transition information is received, if the non-predetermined state is controlled to the special state, the switching between the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display is not performed. Therefore, while preventing an increase in the control load on the information transmission side, it is possible to prevent wasteful execution of the switching control of the variable display of the effect identification information, thereby reducing the processing load of the effect control.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player, and the display result of the variable display is a special display result. When a display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern). The degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the first specific display result, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, the first special symbol or the second 2 The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost design) (for example, the variable display of the first special design or the second special design is a lost design. is forcibly stopped). Therefore, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, in spite of the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variable state, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one identification information becomes a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining retention of the identification information on one side is forcibly stopped and displayed (forcibly lost), even if the variable display is a probability variable big hit, it will be forced to be lost. As a result, the game value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature part 080IW, while the variable display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is forced to miss, the variable display that is a probability variable jackpot is changed (suspended the measurement of the variable time). , while suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as a mode of "not stopping the variable display of one identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Although the case of continuously executing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small winning game. may As long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form, it is acceptable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which game value (for example, prize balls) is likely to be awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be given due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, based on the derivation display of the first specific display result, control is performed to the specific state (for example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game based on the variable probability big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on that, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to implement control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed in both cases of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the execution of the variable display of the second identification information ( Figures 9-1 and 9-2). Also, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information, the first identification Variable display of information is derived and displayed according to a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-55(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the second identification information is not controlled to derive and display the variable display of a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-55(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is taken into consideration.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, the variable display executing means performs variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the result of the second specific display, when being controlled to the specific state. During execution of, based on the fact that a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (FIGS. 9-56, 9- 57). Further, when being controlled to the non-specified state, during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the result of the second specific display, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result (see FIGS. 9-56 and 9-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is in a specific state.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol ) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the game medium entering the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). It is possible. In addition, a variable means (for example, a special variable winning A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state) For example, it can be controlled to either a small winning game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is one of the movement paths. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-40 (1) and (2)) for promoting shooting of game media to a specific path, and variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 9-40 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to make an appropriate notification about the acceleration of the shooting of game media.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, the first reservation storage means (for example, the first reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a reservation memory, and the variable display of the second identification information a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to as reserved storage. Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, Small hit game state) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Further, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the derived display of the special display result as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the reserved memory can be consumed smoothly.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when it is controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls into the special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on the winning of game balls into the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-40 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification It is possible to execute a second specific notification (for example, display of right-handed hitting display 080IW007 shown in FIG. 9-40 (1)). Also, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-40 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. When it does, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-40 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decoration pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and it becomes a small hit , forcibly stop and display non-reach out-of-order symbols). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of the control to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, it is possible to smoothly digest the reserved memory stored in the second reserved storage means.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, the regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the attack countermeasures against the gaming machine.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member is provided as a delay means for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. You may

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and the effect based on the information from the game control means Controlling effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) is provided. In addition, the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed indicator 26) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the right hitting notification is executed during the big win game. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning hole) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the game area. When the big win is achieved by the variation display of the pattern, the left big prize opening is opened during the big win game, and when the big win is achieved by the variation display of the second special pattern, the right big prize opening is opened during the big win game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as above, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed notification is executed during the big win game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It may be configured not to execute the right hitting notification during the big winning game when the big winning is achieved. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured to execute left-handed notification during the big win game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right big winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, the player is prevented from erroneously performing a right-handed operation by executing left-handed information during the big-hit game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right hitting notification is executed even during the KT state is shown, but such a case is shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the second start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, it is configured not to execute the right-handed notification during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting indicator 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right hitting indication 080IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification. Although the case where it does is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even during the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big winning game, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting display 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 It is also possible to display a right-hand hitting display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby executing the right-hand hitting notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 080IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. You may comprise so that right-handed information may be performed by .

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed display 080IW007 shown in FIG. 9-40(1), the image display device 5 can display a symbol indicating right-handed (for example, a right-pointing triangle display). By, you may comprise right-handed information so that it can be performed.

In addition, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right hitting notification is performed during the small winning game (see FIG. 9-40 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the case where the right hitting notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-40 (3)) is shown, but when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol It may be configured so that there is a case where the right-handed information is not performed even in the case. For example, in a normal state and in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the right-handed information is not given during the small-hit game. You may

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, it is controllable to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value, and is common when being controlled to a non-specific state and when being controlled to a specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9 -2). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the setting values change the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball output performance) depending on the setting value may become too noticeable, and gambling may become excessively high. There is Therefore, in this characteristic part 080IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the setting value (small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the setting value. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of special display results (for example, small winning symbols). Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, the special states are the first special state (eg, the first KT state) and the second special state (eg, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. Controllable. Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, normal jackpot, first variable probability big hit, second variable probability big hit, third variable probability big hit). Also, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantage type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Also, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the jackpot type distribution is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessively large. It prevents the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the allocation of the jackpot type is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, it is also possible to vary the determination ratio of the jackpot type depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special judgment value for determining to derive and display (for example, a judgment value for judging a small hit), and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. and a predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for discrepancy judgment). In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Also, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all set values, and the number of predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in judgment values corresponding to specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state The corresponding decision value includes a predetermined decision value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 080IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 9-2), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing an appropriate playability.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if changes and additions are made within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, there is also a gaming machine ( Pachinko game machine 1), game state control means capable of controlling a plurality of game states (for example, a portion that executes steps 080IWS2205 to S2207, S2210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227 in the game control microcomputer 100) Then, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular jackpot occurs, when executing the 50th variation display in the low-probability/high-base state), a predetermined display (for example, left-center-right decoration pattern ) is temporarily made invisible (for example, a shutter effect). A variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display) is provided, and the special effect execution means displays a specific image (for example, FIG. 9-43 (B) and a still image of the state in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are closed shown in FIG. is separated and the predetermined display becomes visible (for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 9-44 (B) and (C) gradually open A moving image that opens) can be executed, and a plurality of types of the specific images can be displayed. The game state control means (CPU 103) controls an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player and a special state (high probability/high base state (variable probability state), high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), and the selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (shown in FIG. 16-6 As such, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the set value), and the special state (high probability / high base state (probability variable state)) is the first period (game state is high probability / high After shifting to a base state (probability variable state), a jackpot game state is entered until a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special game is executed, or before the predetermined number of times of the special game is executed. period until) and a second period after the first period (after the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state, a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) without becoming a jackpot game state (51st time or later or 101st time or later)) after the game is executed. Also high (as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "missing", in the first period [excluding the final change], "non-reach lost (shortened change)" The ratio of selecting "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds), which is a longer variable display period than (variable display period is 5 seconds), is second. 16-6 (A1) and (C1 ), in the second period, when the display result is "missing", the variable display period "non-reach A game machine in which the rate of selection of "Failure (high-speed fluctuation)" (with a fluctuation display period of 1 second) is higher than in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. According to such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect. Furthermore, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the variable display pattern and the special effect may be associated with each other. For example, when a special effect is executed, the fluctuation time of variable display may be longer than or equal to a specific time. By doing so, the player can have more expectations and enjoyment when the variable display time reaches the specific time.

Also, a specific effect may be associated with a set value. For example, when the set value is high, the execution frequency of the specific effect may be made higher than when the set value is low. By doing so, it is possible to guess the setting value by executing the specific effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, when the game state is switched, the setting value may be suggested by the effect mode in the special effect that temporarily makes the predetermined display difficult to see. For example, a plurality of types of special effects are prepared (for example, three types of patterns A, B, and C are prepared as effect patterns for the shutter effect), and the special effect is executed at each timing at which the special effect can be executed. Modes are selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and by varying the selection ratio of each mode of the special performance according to the set values, the more advantageous the set values are for the player, the more favorable the player is. A special effect may be made easier to be executed in a specific type of mode (for example, a shutter effect by pattern C may be more likely to be executed). In this way, the variety of special performance modes is increased, and the player has a sense of expectation that the set values will be advantageous to the player when the special performance of a particular type of mode is executed. is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the first period in the special state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the game interest in the first period (the first half of the special state) in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period is likely to be selected in order to realize a sound game. In particular, since the selection ratio of the variable display pattern is common regardless of the set value, and the set value cannot be determined by the selection ratio of the variable display pattern, the game interest can be further improved by performing the setting suggestion performance. Also, when performing the setting suggesting effect, the setting value may be suggested by a plurality of elements. In this way, when setting values that are advantageous to the player are suggested for a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player. Even if no set value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, if the set value that is advantageous to the player is suggested by another element, the player can maintain the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player. , can improve the game interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, any set value among a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit) A configurable gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) that controls the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 16-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
In the first period, the selection rate of the variable display pattern with the variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is " In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when it becomes "loss", "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection rate of the variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When "losing", in the second period, "non-reach losing (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display 1 second period) is higher than the first period [excluding the final variation]). The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Basic description as a premise of the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12, among the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which are the premises of the later-described characteristic portion 207SG, the differences from FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above will be described. do. Other than these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the premise of the characteristic portion 207SG, is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above with reference to FIGS. is similar to

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 909 . Also, a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S9025). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process of step S9027 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S90115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot open post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pretreatment of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 207SG of this Embodiment)

Next, the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 13-1 and 13-7, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13A, a first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 207SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. In the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the number of reserved memories (special figure reserved memory number) of variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed on the game board 2. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 207SG002L is provided with a general prize winning opening 10, and the right game area 207SG002R is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 13-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 13-2 and 13-7, the main board 11 in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the game machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11. The lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the substrate case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 207SG201. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-1 and 13-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 207SG025A, second reservation display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 207SG133 that lights in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 207SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 13-5, each of the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 207SG025A and second pending display 207SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 207SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13-6, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 207SG025A is lit and the left two LEDs of the second suspension indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure suspension memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure suspension memory After that, the variable display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 909. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. An origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 13-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 13-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-8 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a setting value change operation has started in the pachinko game machine 1 (that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 13-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 13-9, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 13-9, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

13-10 show variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 13-10, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of normal reach in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-10, the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 13-11 (B) Judgment table (setting value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 13-12 (A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 13-12 (B) (Setting value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 13-13 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) shown in FIG. 13-14 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4 ), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 13-15 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 13-15 (B), The first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -21 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 13-21 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 13-11(A) to 13-16(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-15 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-15 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 207SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, and when the set value is 3, 1/ 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 to 13-16, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state according to each setting value is respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability change for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, FIGS. 13-11 (A), 13-12 (A), 13-13 (A), 13-14 (A), 13-15 (A), 13-16 ( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, FIGS. 13-11 (B), 13-12 (B), 13-13 (B), 13-14 (B), 13-15 (B), 13-16 ( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIGS. In the first special figure display result determination table in the case, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. .

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-18, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 13-19, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination value is regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-20, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value, regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. As the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the judgment value contained in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, and regardless of the game state and setting value, hit judgment Based on the value of 32767, the variable display result is determined with the determination value contained within a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 13-11(A) and 13-16(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win gaming state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In the present embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figures 13-21 (A) and 13-21 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Among these, FIG. 13-21 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 13-21 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-22. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the jackpot A (also called non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the low-probability base state and the jackpot game A big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which the high-probability control and the time-saving control are executed after the end and shifts to a high-probability high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or the big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-21 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of the big win increases, and the big win C as the big win type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 13-23 (A) and 13-23 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 13-23 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), if the set value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805. is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 13-23 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), if the set value is "1", , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) determines the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player thinks that "big win B" or "big win C" will be achieved. can raise the expectations of

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Predetermined random values within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the reach α deviation and the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation are assigned as judgment values. It is

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for deviation (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, a shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), a super Predetermined random values within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the reach α deviation and the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation are assigned as judgment values. It is

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in the low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 13-24 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation. In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between each setting value However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, it may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns is different according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIGS. 13-10). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation of super reach loss The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display to be executed in the variation pattern of super reach out in accordance with the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. , The present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed with a variation pattern of

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIGS. . The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 207SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special figure display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 207SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 207SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern hold storage unit 207SG151C stores the normal pattern game hold information which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 207SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate, and is for determining the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 207SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 207SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 13-26(A) includes the production control flag setting unit 207SG191, the production control timer setting unit 207SG192, the production control counter setting unit 207SG193, and the production control buffer setting unit 207SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 207SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the effect symbol variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set is set to the first special figure pending storage and A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage.

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when execution of the pending display prior notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process. , When the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 5D and the second suspension memory display area 5U, and execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined, "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display of a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode ) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, and the variation corresponding to the reserved memory display In the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a high possibility of super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage, start opening winning designation command , symbol designating command, variation category designating command, and pending storage number notification command.

13-26(B), the commands stored in the receive command buffer 207SG194A at the time of start winning shown in FIG. Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 13-26 (B), when the variable display of the effect pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in the pre-reading notice setting process in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set, and the pending display flag is set. If there is an entry that is not displayed, depending on whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed based on the pattern designation command and the variable category command stored corresponding to the entry, and whether the pending display notice effect is executed It determines the display mode (display pattern) of the pending memory display. When the execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, the pending memory display mode is determined from the square (◇) and the star (☆), and when the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, the display mode of the pending memory display. is determined as a white ○. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the reserved storage display is set to the reserved display flag.

After the pending display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process (see FIG. 13-52) so that the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 207SG005D or the second pending memory display area. 207SG005U.

Note that the feature part 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a prefetch notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the prefetch notice setting process, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, as the pre-reading notice effect, the background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, and the operation effect in which the movable body provided in the pachinko game machine 1 operates. An effect other than the display announcement effect may be made executable.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 13-27(A), the display monitor 207SG029 has a first display section 207SG029A, a second display section 207SG029B, a third display section 207SG029C, and a fourth display section 207SG029D. Each of the first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 207SG029A to fifth display section 207SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 13-27 (B) and 13-27 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 207SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 207SG029B in order to display "b2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-29, the main board 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-28, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine When the setting value set to 1 is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 207SG029, and when the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to "5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 207SG029. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change processing described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13-30 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (207SGSa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (207SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). move on.

At 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 207SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (207SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) without executing, go to 207SGSa014.

At 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), proceed to 207SGSa022; (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

In addition, at 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to the formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the set values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029 stops blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be lit.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and the interrupt is permitted (207SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), the processing shown in FIG. 13-36 As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B that constitute the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal set value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. , the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (B), the CPU 103 flashes all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the game hall, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a store clerk, etc.), and the display monitor 207SG029 , the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the abnormal setting value is set or when the power failure during the change of the setting value is recovered, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 13-31(A) is a flow chart showing RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) where the RAM clear flag is stored. (207SGSa45).

If the specified address does not store the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), proceed to 207SGSa042. , and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing is terminated.

In the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area as shown in FIG. 13-31(B). Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 onwards) include special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol and a set value read out for setting the display result determination table when determining the variable display result in normal processing (determination used set value) are stored. Backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipping state is set to the leading address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be executed without fail. A display on the display device 5 or the like may prompt the user to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process.

In other words, the RAM clearing process in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG in the present embodiment, a mode of clearing data other than the set value in the RAM clearing process is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. When activated by the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 and after in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG in the present embodiment, the form of storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is stored in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the processing of storing and reading RAM clear flags in RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. In addition, when storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102, since the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM clear flag can be changed by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 13-32 is a flow chart showing the set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first reservation indicator. 207SG025A starts blinking the second suspension indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa052, see FIG. 13-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 13-6). lighting is started (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value of 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). If a setting value other than 1 to 6 is stored in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the setting value is stored in address F000 in RAM 102. is set to "1" (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1̂& is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power failure detection process execution wait timer for waiting until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the timer to wait for the start of power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa056). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processing of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa056; Y) executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets a set value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process advances to 207SGSa065. The content is updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "2", is provisionally set. For example, the set value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102, and a value larger by one than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowed setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. Then, the display monitor 207SG029 displays the setting value set in the display monitor 207SG029.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF at 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the set value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and turn off all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A, and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the provisional setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. It is determined whether or not the setting value stored at address F000 is different from the provisional setting value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070).

If the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the provisional setting value stored at address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, where the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is the same. If the set value stored at address F001 is different from the provisional set value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the provisional set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 is stored at address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. In other words, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the provisional set values are updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set values.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 13-33 is a flow chart showing set value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first holding indicator. 207SG025A starts blinking the second suspension indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa102, see FIG. 13-37(A)). Furthermore, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 13-6). lighting is started (207SGSa103).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power interruption detection process execution to wait until the power interruption detection process is executed (207SGSa105 ). Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa107). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processing of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa107; Y) executes a power failure detection process (207SGSa108). This power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game arcade management computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. Also, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the setting value in the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation process.

Thus, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the lighting of the round indicator 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right strike lamp 207SG232, a player or a store clerk of the game hall can see from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that the pachinko machine 1 is changing the setting value or that the setting value is being changed. is being confirmed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, Although a form in which only one LED is lit is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 is the jackpot A, jackpot shown in FIG. 13-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. , the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are set to change The lights may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power outage), the lock switch 207SG051 is pressed while the game machine frame 207SG003 is open. , and the clear switch are turned on to execute the set value change process.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 13-35(A) to 13-35(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the display using the fourth display section 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 13-27) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value changing process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 start to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. When the setting switch 207SG052 is operated while the setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display section 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display section 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off once, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the game machine frame 207SG003 is open. (The clear switch is turned off) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 13-35 (A), 13-35 (B) and 13-35 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first The display using the display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D (the display of the base values shown in FIG. 13-27) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are started to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. The display of the setting value on the fourth display section 207SG029D is terminated when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for playing.

FIG. 13-34 is a flow chart showing power failure detection processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change processing and set value confirmation processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (207SGS081). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and if there is a power-off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and stores the identified backup data in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. S21 to S27 (see FIG. 11) are to be executed later.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing section 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 will be described based on FIG. 13-39. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (207SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 207SG154, should be able to identify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 207SGS502 when the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (207SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (207SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 207SGS505, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (207SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506). .

After executing either of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 207SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted and specified (207SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time. It is specified to determine the variable display result in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525).

Following the processing of 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the process of 207SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (207SGS513). The reserved memory number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the processing of 207SGS504 is performed. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (207SGS516), the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 13-40(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 207SGS 512 in FIG. 13-39 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 207SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 12, FIGS. result) is set as "big hit" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state is determined and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 207SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 13-40 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (207SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the process of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 13-31(B)) and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 13-42, processing is performed to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit" or "loss".

As shown in FIG. 13-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 determines the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that it will be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 207SGS572, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not become a big hit (207SGS572; N), a small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table Compare the numerical value range and the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination (207SGS573), and the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at 207SGS509 in FIG. 13-39 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined that the 207SGS574 is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display will result in a loss (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 13-40 (A), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variable display will be a big hit at 207SGS575 (207SGS526), and if it is determined that it will not be a big hit (207SGS526; N), at 207SGS525 in the variable display Check whether it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined to be a loss in the variable display (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "miss (207SGS527a), whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time-saving state (207SGS528).

When it is determined at 207SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (207SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type as a table for determining the big hit variation pattern (207SGS535), and set to 207SGS536. move on.

In addition, when it is determined at 207SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (207SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

Also, if the time saving flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (207SGS529), and if the time saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y ), select and set the variation pattern determination table D for failure (207SGS530). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these variation pattern determination table A and deviation pattern determination table D, this characteristic unit 207SG has a variation pattern determination for deviation that is used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4. A table B and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total pending storage number is 5 or more are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. In, for non-reach fluctuation patterns, among the ranges that can be taken by the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 1 to 450 when the setting value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the setting value is 2, When the set value is 3, 1 to 410 are assigned, when the set value is 4, 1 to 390 are assigned, when the set value is 5, 1 to 370 are assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1 to 350 are assigned.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, if the set value is 1, the set value is 1 to 500, and the set value is 1 to 480 if the set value is 2, 1 to 460 if the set value is 3, 1 to 440 if the set value is 4, 1 to 420 if the set value is 5, 1 to 420 if the set value is 6 400 are assigned to each.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C and the variation pattern determination table for loss D, when the set value is 1 within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, and set If the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss, 701 to 997 are assigned regardless of the set value, out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the dynamic pattern for the super reach variation pattern. there is

Therefore, in 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is made after the determination. Also always becomes a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss .

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (207SGS536). In this characteristic portion 207SG, as shown in FIG. 13-40(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIG. 13-41 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 13-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), it moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, at 207SGS541, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, if the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. In this way, the processing of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at 207SGS541, and whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" determine whether As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS546, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A The indicated pending data is shifted upward by one entry (207SGS547).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (207SGS548), it moves to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 (207SGS549). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the process of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 13-31(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information stored in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 13-31(B)) and determines whether or not there is a determination used set value (207SGS551). If it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified in 207SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value is the same as the stored determined used set value (207SGS553).

In 207SGS553, if it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored determination used setting value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the setting value to the effect control board 12 Setting for transmission is performed (207SGS554), and a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), looping. go into processing. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so the loop processing puts the pachinko gaming machine in a game-disabled state (game-disabled state). The error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment stores the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display and the address currently stored in the top address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game parlor can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the loop processing and does not execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a non-playable state. However, the CPU 103 performs processing such as restricting the shooting of game balls, and not performing the payout of prize balls or the variable display of special symbols even if the game balls to each winning hole win. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 207SG, a difference between the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is treated as an abnormality, and the abnormality is detected by the management device of the game hall. Although the recognizable form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are shown in FIGS. 13-36 ( B) or a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of the characteristic portion 207SG, if the set value stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 is different from the set value used for determination, transmission of an error designation command to the effect control board 12 and the game Although the security signal is output only once to the field management device, the present invention is not limited to this. may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the above-described unplayable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 207SG, when the set value of judgment used and the set value currently stored at the head address of RAM 102 are different, CPU 103 puts pachinko gaming machine 1 in a non-playable state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko game It is not necessary to control the machine 1 to be in a non-playable state.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state when the determined used set value is different from the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, a game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device may be executed, or the setting value stored at the top address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored at the head address of the RAM 102, or the most disadvantageous value for the player (this By setting 1) in the characterizing section 207SG of the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

When it is determined in 207SGS551 that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553 If it is determined that the stored judgment used set value is the same (207SGS553: Y), select the special figure display result judgment table according to the current game state, the start mouth buffer value and the set value (207SGS556). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 13-40(A), that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 13-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variable display will result in a big hit at 207SGS557 (207SGS558), and if it is determined that it will not result in a big hit (207SGS558; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display will result in a small hit at 207SGS557. (207SGS559).

When it is determined at 207SGS558 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 13-21 (A) and (B) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in the jackpot type determination table. , "jackpot C", which one of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be determined (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 207SGS563, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. Whether or not to control is determined before deriving a fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type Remember. For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", then "1", if "jackpot B", then "2", and if "jackpot C", then "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined at 207SGS559 that it will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), it proceeds to 207SGS560 and sets the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 to ON state (207SGS560). .

On the other hand, if it is not determined at 207SGS559 that the variable display results in a small hit, that is, if the variable display results in a loss (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is set), whether to control to the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) A fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the prior determination result of , and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "jackpot" at 207SGS558, when the jackpot type at 207SGS563 is "jackpot A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. set to In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" at 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set at 207SGS560), the advance to the effect that the special figure display result is "small hit" Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in 207SGS565, after updating and storing the set value specified in 207SGS553 in RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process. (207SGS567), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, since the judgment used setting value is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 13-31 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started. In this example, the used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is performed when the used setting value is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing the value in the area of the RAM 102 that has not been cleared by the RAM clearing process, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the used setting value and the RAM 102 can be determined when executing the first variable display. The set value (the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) stored at the head address of the pachinko game machine 1 may be compared.

13-40 and 13-41, the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode of determining a variable display result using a variable display result determination module that executes common processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the comparison processing (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIG. 13-41) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the processing do not match the determined used set value, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the game stop state (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the used determination set value, or the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determination used value as a result of the process Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set value does not match the finished set value, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 13-43 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the production control main process, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the production control board 12. circuit) register settings, etc.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception wait timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception wait timer times out.

When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player is After accepting the input of information, the information stored in the RAM 122 including the number of variations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When there is no reception of the hot start notification command (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the cold notification command (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information stored in the RAM 122 and the performance information (the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of (207SGS409), and notifies that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. (207SGS410) RAM clear notification processing for (executing RAM clear notification). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-36(A), the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared. The display of the notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated, the light emission of the game effect lamp 909, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko machine 1 is started. For example, it is sufficient to notify that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Moreover, when there is no reception of the cold start notification command (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). If the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the setting value is changed. A setting value related notification process for notifying that an operation is in progress (setting value changing notification) or that a setting value is being checked (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. , the notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. The state in which the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open generally means that the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, and the store clerk or the like of the game arcade who changes or confirms the setting values visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. is in a state of In other words, the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the setting value. It is conceivable that the store clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Therefore, as the setting value changing notification and the setting value checking notification, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and light emission of the game effect lamp 909 are used to notify the pachinko machine clerk who changes or confirms the setting value. 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321, and a second movable body initialization process for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. Execute the process (207SGS414). In addition, in the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. (See Figure 13-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-47 and 13-48. FIG. 13-47 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing the operation modes of the non-detection time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. 13-48, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection time operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their origin position (first position) and effect position (second position). 2 position) and the return movement from the performance position to the origin position are the actual movement modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display.

The effect control CPU 120, when the detected parts of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed, If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 has moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, when transported or installed on the game island, or if it was not possible to return to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when the performance is executed, the motor is disconnected) When the return to the origin of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed or cannot be operated due to a malfunction, failure, or catching, etc., a movable body error (abnormal operation) occurs, or the vibration of the game machine causes it to move from the origin position. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 13-32) due to circumstances, etc.) Execute non-detection operation control for Since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position when the non-detection operation control is executed, only the movement of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position is performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The motion control for confirming the actual motion is the same motion as the actual motion actually performed in the rendering using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body rendering executed during variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. 13-48(A) and 13-48(B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. , 207SG322 at actual operating speeds. That is, for example, when the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated, even if the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, the one movement section and other movement sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down in the same movement section, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 The actual operating speed may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, movement distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322 are not necessarily the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and If there are differences in operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not always the same.

As shown in FIG. 13-48(A), when executing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the performance position, and to accelerate from the performance position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is set to a low speed between the origin position and the production position. Change from high speed to low speed. In other words, the effect control CPU120, when executing the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the lowest speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed that is faster than the lowest speed Since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at speeds within the range of , the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the minimum speed Each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speed is adjusted so as to achieve the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the lowest control speed, they are operated at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, they are operated at the maximum speed. It will be explained assuming that

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. Further, when returning to the original position after moving to the performance position, the movable body 207SG321, SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321. 207SG322 is reliably decelerated, and then the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 detect the detected portions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-48 (B), the effect control CPU 120, when executing the non-detection operation control, during the period of moving from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position , to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU120, the maximum speed in the non-detection time operation control as the first operation control (maximum operation speed) is the speed below the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the second operation control (this implementation In the feature part 207SG in the form of, the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always set so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is performed.

In this case, it is unknown how far away the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. When the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected parts, or the movable bodies cannot be reliably detected from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged due to the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 and the like may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 13-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 changes the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. (207SGS415). If the setting value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412, and if a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; Y) goes to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the process of 207SGS416.

At 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If so (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not ended (207SGS419; N), proceed to 207SGS412; Determine if the flag is set (207SGS420).

In 207SGS420, if the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) is the same process as 207SGS413. Then, the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as 207SGS414, is executed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS424; N), proceed to 207SGS422. (207SGS424; Y) goes to 207SGS427.

As described above, for the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the set value confirmation in progress notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process to run. As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed. After completing the operation check, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-49(A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. If it is received, that is, if the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is finished after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is finished, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed again. A movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-49(B), of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed. When the CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 has not yet been completed. If the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed in a state where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It's like

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-49(C), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization processing has not yet ended. In other words, if the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed while the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed, the first movable body initialization process being executed and the second movable body initialization process are executed. Only the initialization process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

In addition, when there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command at 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the error designation command (207SGS425). . If an error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) is executed to notify an error indicated by the error designation command. If an error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N) , 207 SGS 403 .

As the error notification in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. good. Since the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified by the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can understand that an incorrect value is set as the setting value from the notification image 207SG005M4. , the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again in a state in which power was interrupted during the change of the set value, and the set value (determined used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the head address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that it is different from the preset value. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and the error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. , there are two error notification processes.

Of these, for the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an error that occurred when the pachinko game machine 1 is started (the Error notification processing (207SGS439) that can be executed after the notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted by the pachinko gaming machine 1 The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred after the completion of the activation (CPU 103 receives the error designation command transmitted in the processing of 207SGS554 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 13-41). Just do it.

Thus, in the effect control main process in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of , from the RAM 122, the performance information (the number of fluctuations since the previous startup of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) ) and set value information (one of the numerical values “1” to “6” corresponding to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122 . When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the player information and performance information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. - 特許庁Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the performance information are not cleared from the RAM 122, but the setting value information is already stored in the RAM 122. It overwrites (updates and memorizes) the existing set value information.

That is, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting value confirmation state, or setting value change state. there is

Then, at 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which one of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the command. Start displaying the initial pattern according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value. If it is not set, the image display device 5 starts to display decorative patterns as initial patterns in a combination of "1", "2" and "3" from the left. Also, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays the initial symbol " 4”, “5”, and “6” are combined to start displaying the decoration pattern.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, "6") advantageous to the player is When set, a combination of "4", "5", and "6" is used as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko game machine 1 is set with setting values that are advantageous to the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, "6") advantageous to the player is The initial pattern to be displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Also, when a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set and when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the sound to be output, the light intensity of the game effect lamp 909, etc. may be varied.

Then, returning to FIG. 13-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets "4" to the pre-reading regulation counter in order to regulate the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the first 4 fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . If it is the first interruption from the startup of the pachinko game machine 1, it identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, It selects the activation notification process table corresponding to the received command and starts the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command. After starting the start-notifying process timer, the pachinko game machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-notifying process timer and the start-notifying process table by executing start-notifying processing in subsequent interrupts. Notification should be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is either a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. Depending on whether there is, the mode of start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-46, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives a new When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 909 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound A is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The timing for starting light emission of these game effect lamps 909 for 60 seconds and the timing for starting output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. It may be different from the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when no new setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , the game effect lamp 909 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The 60-second emission start timing of these game effect lamps 909 and the 30-second emission start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 909 for 60 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It includes both executing the output of B.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 909 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). The timing for starting light emission of the game effect lamp 909 for 40 seconds, the timing for starting outputting the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the timing for starting the display of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 909 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when the set value change end notification command is received, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Unlike , since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5 , it is easy to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed using the game effect lamp 909, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a game hall management computer or each machine counter, and the pachinko game machine 1 starts up. A signal that can specify that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as a start notification when the pachinko game machine 1 is started.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, the device for executing the activation notification is partly common even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. (in any case, light emission of the game effect lamp 909 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. Depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state, the device that executes the start notification differs (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the image display device 5 , a message image may be displayed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a signal may be output from the external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

In addition, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the notification mode in each device that executes start notification may be changed. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, all the game effect lamps 909 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are caused to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the game effect lamps 909 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be illuminated.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game machine frame 207SG003 is in the open state, so the sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (the pachinko game machine 1 If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers). Therefore, sound may be output from all speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting changing", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When the program is started by the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared."

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals, the terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be changed according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is displayed as the setting value changing notification. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period), and after the change of the set value is completed, the signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as RAM clear notification. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, it is only necessary to output a signal from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be varied according to each notification.

As described above, in the start-up notification process, the form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified in a form in which it is executed even when any of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value confirmation end notification command, and setting value change end notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to these commands, and the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if received, the pachinko machine 1 A command that does not execute activation notification may be provided.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, different modes of activation notification are executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although a form in which different combinations of decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to the command received when the is activated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these initialization effects are The mode of activation notification and the combination of decoration patterns may all be different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only some of them may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, when it is started by cold start, when it is started in the setting change state, when it is started in the setting confirmation state also exemplifies a mode of executing start notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start or when it is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 13-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 13-51, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. (207SGS441). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Returning to FIG. 13-43, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the received command buffer. Incidentally, the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13-8) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, production random number update processing (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating production random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers (207SGS435), player information input processing (207SGS436) for accepting input of player information, game A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information, an effect information totalization process (207SGS438) for totalizing effect information, and an error notification process (207SGS439) are executed. After that, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a password (a password generated by an external server in which the game information of the player is stored in advance) by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone, receives the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122 . Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variable display, the big win game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and generates the two-dimensional code. is displayed on the image display device 5 . After the two-dimensional code is displayed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smart phone, and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

In the production information tallying process, the production control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as information for production each time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed. do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received from the CPU 103 . If the error designation command is received, the error notification corresponding to the received error designation command is executed.

Next, the effect control process processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 13-52, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451). When the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the prefetch advance notice setting process (S161), it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U. The pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed to update the pending memory display number and the display mode of the pending memory display according to the value of the pending memory number and the pending display flag stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. , S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

In addition, when the value of the prefetch regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452 ). If the value of the effect control process flag is one of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed and S170 is executed according to the effect control process flag. To S177 (see FIG. 7) to execute one of the processing, if the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452; Y), -1 the value of the prefetch regulation counter (207SGS453), Hold display update processing (207SGS454) is executed and one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 immediately after starting, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the effect control CPU120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process, four times variable display However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started, the CPU 103 starts the start winning determination process (Fig. 12) is not executed, execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being in a state in which a game can be played, execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four times of variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The light intensity of the effect lamp 909, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the prefetch notice effect, For example, an effect of displaying a specific background image on the image display device 5, an effect of moving a specific movable body, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, emitting light from the game effect lamp 909, and the like may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Regardless, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values. Then, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), from 1238 according to each setting value The range up to the value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is set to a non-common numerical range from 1020 according to each set value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

Especially in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value is plural. Compared to the case where it is provided, there is no need to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control to the jackpot game state) more than once. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to perform control in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, the above-described hit determination value With 1020 as the jackpot reference value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges. , Whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the variable state Since it suffices to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the big hit game state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure The number of determination values included in the range is different (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the second special figure display result The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice). is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small winning game state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the big hit when the set value is 6, whether it is controlled to the big hit game state When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value, and the small winning game state is controlled. When determining whether or not, the random number MR1 is from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

Moreover, the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment can store the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . Then, as shown in FIG. 13-41, the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment stores the In addition to reading out the setting value, set the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value corresponding to the read setting value (set the display result determination table according to the set value), and enter the big hit game state It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read setting values. It is possible to prevent the display result from being judged.

Note that the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which setting values are read from the RAM 102 each time variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read setting values. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read setting values from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read setting values. . When the display result determination table is set according to the setting values read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting is performed during the period until the power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and stores the read setting value and the previous variable display result. The set value read out from the RAM 102 (determination used set value) is compared with the set value read out from the RAM 102 for determination. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIG. 13-50), it is possible to prevent inappropriate variable display results from being determined due to reading of an inappropriate set value. can. Furthermore, not only can it be possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, but it is also possible to make people around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. As a result, game parlor staff and the like can quickly deal with abnormal set values.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used set value each time the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be set based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison, the effect An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-40 to 13-42, the CPU 103 uses a variable display result determination module common to when executing the winning random number value determination and when performing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is judged, part of the processing can be shared between the execution of the winning random number judgment and the execution of the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the setting value read from the RAM 102 corresponding display result determination table is set), so the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state. When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102, the processing for setting the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is shared. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 13-17 to 13-20, when 1 (setting value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot game state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set so as to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the big-hit determination value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 207SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to appropriately notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 207SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values); ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is established (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 13-30), the value set by the setting means is changed. Transition to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32),
When it is in the setting state, the information display section displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit is in the setting state in which variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is performed. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values); ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When the confirmation condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-30, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started), the setting means sets to a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 13-33) in which the set values that have been set can be confirmed,
When it is in the confirmation state, the information display section displays a display that enables recognition of the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the information display section that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, notifies that it is in a confirmation state. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display that allows recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-4 and 13-37). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when it is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. different part)
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can be recognized as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display The part that lights up all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the variable display section.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. part),
As a display that can be recognized that it is the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display units are displayed in a lighting state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B The part that lights up all the segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a game by shooting game media into game areas (e.g., left game area 207SG002L and right game area 207SG002R),
The information display unit includes a shooting direction reporting unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that reports the shooting direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, the firing direction notification unit displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-37(A), The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the shooting direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 7 of invention 207SG,
Equipped with a pending storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 12) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the holding display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (A), setting A portion that blinks all the segments that constitute the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B in the value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the hold display section.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 8 of invention 207SG,
a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which game media can enter and a second state in which game media are less likely to enter than the first state in the advantageous state;
The information display unit includes a number of times notification unit (for example, a round indicator 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device becomes the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (A), the setting A part where only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit in the value change state or the set value confirmation state)
According to the game machine characterized by the following, according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the number of times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 8 of invention 207SG,
game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game;
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
State information storage means (for example, the area of address F002 of RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means when the power is turned on;
with
The game control means is
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) is established. When the game information is being erased, initialization processing (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 13-31(A)) for initializing the game information storage means is executed. is executable and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial state executed when the first condition is satisfied. initialization processing and common initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a portion capable of executing RAM clear processing and set value change processing),
The state information is not erased regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-31(A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process) part that does not)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be shared between when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. The initialization processing based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state cannot be appropriately ignored. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 208SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values); ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is established (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 13-30), the value set by the setting means is changed. Transition to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display that can specify that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-37(B) , If an error occurs more than the set value, all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display area where the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since the fact that the operation has been performed is notified by the display, it is possible to appropriately notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition has been met.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of Invention 208SG,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is an error related to at least a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error greater than or equal to the set value). It is possible to suitably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and that the set value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set values changed in the setting state are determined, an error related to the storage area storing the set values will occur when the power failure is restored. 13-37(B), a display that can identify the occurrence of an error is displayed in the variable display area even if the first A part that blinks all the segments that constitute the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the setting value needs to be reset due to the power failure occurring before the setting value is determined without providing a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that it is.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 209SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent No. 6209653, for example, discloses a pachinko game machine having information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value to be awarded. However, when applying the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 to the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the display unit for confirming the set value and the information display means There was a problem that the cost of the gaming machine could not be reduced if each was provided separately. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values); ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (e.g., a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a big winning opening, etc.) The part where prize balls are paid out by doing) and
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information (for example, the base shown in FIG. information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying
with
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-35, the pachinko game If the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the setting value can be displayed in the setting value confirmation state),
The number of display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-35, the base value is When displayed, the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D are used, and when the set values are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display section Part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Since there is no need to provide them individually, the cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can specify that an error has occurred in at least the storage area storing the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-36(B), When an abnormal set value error occurs, the portion where "E."
When the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed, the number of the display units used is the same (for example, FIGS. 13-35 (A) and 13-36 (B) , the display monitor 207SG029 displays the base value and the occurrence of an abnormal error on the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display. 207SG029D), and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which the set value is stored, and to set the set value information. are different error information.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be lit independently (for example, the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D each have eight display sections). segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means at the time of power-on satisfies an initialization condition (for example, that a clear switch is ON), the information display means displays the information displayed on the small screen constituting each display unit. All of the display units are turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 207SG029D repeats all lighting and all lights out of all segments (flashing))
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 4 of invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
The information display means displays the set value information without entering the all lighting display state (for example, when the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition). As shown in FIG. 13-32, when the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029)
According to this feature, the setting value can be confirmed quickly.

The present embodiment also includes invention 210SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a movable body confirmation operation based on a setting value change operation, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-189349, if the confirming operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is being changed, the operator may miss the confirming operation. Therefore, it is conceivable that the confirmation operation is executed again after the operation for changing the set value is completed. At this timing, a new operation for confirming the movable body is started, and there is a problem that the movable body may perform an unintended movement. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
operably provided movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values); ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which setting values can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process),
The control means is
confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally; It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-49, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including operation confirmation operation control, and the actual operation from the timing of receiving the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing a checking operation by the checking operation control when shifting to the setting state, the checking operation control due to the completion of the setting state is not executed (for example, , As shown in FIG. 13-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command When the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Portion where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 2 of invention 210SG,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 13-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values); ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion where the CPU 103 executes set value confirmation processing when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally , and can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the first movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing are sequentially executed, and the setting value change end notification command and setting value confirmation A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirming state ends while the movable body is performing a confirming operation by the confirming operation control when shifting to the confirming state, the confirming operation control due to the completion of the confirming state is not executed (for example, , As shown in FIG. 13-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command When the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Portion where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not positioned at the predetermined origin position, a return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed in the confirmation operation. When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation (for example, the first movable In the body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after finishing the non-detection automatic operation control)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 13-49 (C), the first movable If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing is newly executed after the second movable body initialization processing is executed. part where body initialization processing is not executed) On the other hand, if the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control is executed according to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, FIG. 13- As shown in 49 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value check start notification command is completed, and the second movable body is initialized. If a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly performed after the second movable body initialization process is completed. and the part that executes sequentially)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the fifth aspect of invention 210SG,
comprising a plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first facial initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the confirmation operation has not been completed for all the movable bodies, the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed satisfies a predetermined condition. Confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the Part where the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 13-49(B), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process is completed and a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is executed. After the end of the part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly executed in order)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

The characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the game information display portion 207SG200 is replaced with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the normal A pattern display 207SG020, a normal pattern reservation display 207SG025C, a round display 207SG131, a right-handed lamp 207SG132, a variable probability lamp 207SG133, and a time-saving lamp 207SG134 were exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, The game information display unit 207SG200 may or may not include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value check process (set value check state). 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are exemplified in the form of lighting in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different manners depending on whether there is one or when the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is any.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, by lighting all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the second The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although the form to be made different was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting mode) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, these first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol It is not necessary to turn on some of all the segments forming the display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round indicator 207SG131 which are configured with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. 1 segment lighting, right-handed lamp 207SG132, first suspension indicator 207SG025A and second suspension indicator 207SG025B All segments are blinking. Instead, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, lighting of one segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131, blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and configuration of the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B Blinking of all segments to be performed may not be performed, or may be performed only partially.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit. is not limited to this, and unless the combination corresponds to the jackpot type shown in FIG. There may be.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the form of executing the notification of the set value abnormal error using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B was exemplified, but the present invention For example, the pachinko game machine 1 may be individually provided with an error notification LED, and the occurrence of the setting value abnormality error may be notified by lighting or blinking the LED.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is provided of the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The machine 1 may not be equipped with the display monitor 207SG029. If the pachinko game machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, it is sufficient to newly provide display means for displaying the setting values (or temporary setting values) in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. .

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed during execution of the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is executed. Although the form of determining whether or not to execute has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute new first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, A mode for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by setting the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hitting lamp 207SG132, etc. to a mode different from that during the game, but the present invention. is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the round display, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right strike lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game if it is possible to notify that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. .

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, A mode for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by setting the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hitting lamp 207SG132, etc. to a mode different from that during the game, but the present invention. is not limited to this, and the ``mode different from that during the game'' may include a different flashing cycle, a different brightness, a different light emission color of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value check start notification command. As the processing, an example has been exemplified in which the operation control when each movable body is not detected and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. From the time of receiving the command and the setting value confirmation start notification command, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command , actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by lighting or blinking the round indicator 207SG131 and the right strike lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display section 207SG200) to explain that the lighting and blinking of the right hitting lamp 207SG132 are performed. By doing so, a store clerk or the like in a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko game machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being misidentified as a failure of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ;Y).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. range) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, FIGS. 13-53 (A) and 13-53 (B) 2, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the game state or set value.

In addition, if the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the increase in the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. , and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Further, when the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1237), and the small hit determination value The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the game state is a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 13-53 (B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit determination The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value standard value). Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Also, if the set value is 3, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

In addition, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are set continuously in this way, as shown in FIG. 13-54, Set the numerical range of the small hit judgment value to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is varied according to the set value. It is sufficient to vary the jackpot probability according to the set value.

In addition, when setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. is the minimum value of the jackpot judgment value (in the example shown in FIG. 13-54, 64990 for set value 1, 64974 for set value 2, and 64954 for set value 3) or more. When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is further varied by determining whether or not the random number MR1 is greater than or equal to 65208 which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By judging the variable display in this way, the variable display result is judged without executing both the judgment of whether the variable display result is a big hit or the judgment of whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining the result of variable display can be reduced.

As described above, in FIGS. 13-53 and 13-54, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the big hit determination value Common numerical range and common numerical range of small hit judgment value, If 2 to 6 are set as setting values in pachinko machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value and non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value Common numerical value range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit determination value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit determination regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. It can be determined whether to control to Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big win game state or the small win game state, the big win game is played by judging whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control to either the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the processing load to determine whether to control to the big hitting game state and the determination of whether to control to the small hitting game state It is possible to reduce the processing load for performing

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-53, when the game state is controlled to the probability variable state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the jackpot reference value, and the increased jackpot determination value Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of the big hit decision value increases Since it is sufficient to determine whether to control, the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Also, in the forms shown in FIGS. 13-53 and 13-54, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, the CPU 103 reduces the processing load of determining whether to control to the big win game state. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 13-53 and 13-54, the form in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is exemplified, but the present invention is this However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In addition, in the characterizing section 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in 13-55 and FIG. 13-56, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values may be set to different numerical ranges.

In addition, when setting the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value ( The common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the non-common numerical range when the set value of the big hit judgment value is 6 In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the highest number of values), a numerical range that is continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in Figure 13-55, 32767 to 33421 in Figure 13-56, in any case The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, while the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the variation special figure, the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value Although the form with different numbers is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same as.

As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. there is In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, the numerical range different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range according to the setting value with 60000 as the standard value (60000 to 60016 for setting value 2, 60000 to 60035 for setting value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for setting value 6) is a big hit It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value according to the change of the set value. load can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and to determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot game state with 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value for the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, as with the characteristic portion 207SG described above, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value And in a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, it is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, the CPU 103 is the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning game state with 32767 as the small winning reference value, the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning game state of the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, each set value is set. Although the form of setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A common numerical range may be established. Incidentally, even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the same reference as in FIGS. A range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be the smallest when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of , the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Furthermore, in the form shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, if the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value On the other hand, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special figure, so the CPU 103 determines that the variation special figure is the second Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the small winning game state by using the same value 32767 as the reference value in the case of the 1 special figure and the case of the 2nd special figure, whether to control to the small winning game state by the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not.

In addition, in the forms shown in FIGS. 13-55 and 13-56, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical range of the big hit determination value or not common. It is determined whether or not to control to a big winning game state based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small winning determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined whether to control to a small hit game state or not. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and it may be determined whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number MR1, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). You may judge whether to control to a state.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic part 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 14-1 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 14-1, the same processing as in FIG. 13-32 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 14-3. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 13-32 is performed.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the set value changing flag (207SGSa066). Details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 14-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 13-32 is performed.

FIG. 14-2 is a flow chart showing setting value confirmation processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 14-2, the same processing as in FIG. 13-33 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 14-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 14-1. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 13-33 is performed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off at 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes game stop end processing (10FS002). Details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 14-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 14-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set values on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 13-33 is performed.

(Regarding various timers)
Next, game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period of the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops clocking by these timers. These timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot gaming state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by using the inter-round interval period timer.

The V lid opening time timer is a V-variable game machine that controls the game state after the jackpot game is over based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid that is controlled to the open state and the closed state provided in front of the sensor that detects the V probability change. In the V probability variable gaming machine, the V cover is in an open state in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. Such a region where the V lid is open is called a V winning region. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by using the V lid open time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning to determine that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 controls the game ball that has passed through the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A game ball that has passed through the switch) is also determined as a V prize within the effective period. The CPU 103 counts the validity period of the V prize during which the V prize is determined to be valid by the V pass waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. . The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when it is in the closed state by an electric chew opening time timer. .

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of variable display of special symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol variation time timer. The normal pattern fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of normal patterns. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which a fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that a big win is controlled at the start of a big win. The fanfare period is a period in which a fanfare effect is executed as an effect operation for announcing the start of the big win game state after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which an ending effect is executed, which is a period for reporting the end of the big win when the big win ends. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as a effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 has a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, etc. as timers other than the timers described above. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started by the special symbol variation stop period timer. The normal pattern fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next normal pattern is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started by the normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer.

(Game stop start process)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 14-3 is a flow chart showing the game stop start process in the characterizing part 10F. First, in the game stop start process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is in operation (10FS010). At 10FS010, if the attacker release time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). At 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is operating (10FS012). At 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). At 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the V passage waiting time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). At 10FS014, if the electric chew opening time timer is in operation (10FS014; Y), the electric chew opening time timer that is in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends. If the electric chew opening time timer is not in operation (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016). At 10FS016, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016; Y), the normal pattern fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017). At 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). At 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation (10FS019). At 10FS019, if other timers are in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timers in operation are stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), other processing (10FS021) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the batting operation handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting gate, the general winning gate 10, the out gate, and the passage gate 41, a processing of disabling the detection of various errors, This includes processing for invalidating the payout of prize balls. Other processes (10FS021) invalidate various processes and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 14-4 is a flow chart showing game stop end processing in the characterizing portion 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). At 10FS030, if the attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). At 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032). At 10FS032, if the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). At 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the processing is terminated.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034). At 10FS034, if the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the electric chew opening time timer that is in operation is activated (10FS040), and the processing ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer being stopped is operated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). At 10FS036, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal pattern fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). At 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). At 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped (10FS039). At 10FS039, if other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the other stopped timers are activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, processing to enable firing of the batting operation handle 30, processing to enable various sensors provided in the starting port, general winning port 10, out port, and passage gate 41, processing to enable detection of various errors, This includes processing for validating the payout of prize balls. Various processes are validated by the other process (10FS041), and the game is normally executed.

(Regarding the effects of characteristic parts)
As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted from the setting confirmation state, and the game progresses. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the end. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the inter-round interval period in the setting confirmation state. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the game progressing due to the subtraction of the effective period of the V winning prize in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 determines the validity period of the electronic chew open time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. is stopped, and the effective period of the electric chew open time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is ready to enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. is stopped, and the counting of the effective period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed. is stopped, and the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is resumed based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, Based on the termination of the setting confirmation state, the fanfare time timer is restarted to count the validity period. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the fanfare effect and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state. .

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 stops the effective period of the ending time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled while the ending effect is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The timing of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention can be applied to the present invention. included. Modifications of the characteristic portion 10F will be described below.

A gaming machine (so-called type 1 gaming machine) that shifts to a big win game state based on the result of variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns has been described, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area has been described. A game machine (so-called type 2 game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on the fact that a game ball wins (V prize) in a special winning port (V winning port) inside, and the first and second types It may be applied in a game machine (one type and two type mixing machine) that combines the When the starting winning to the second starting winning port is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the determination result of the big win is obtained, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the result of the big win display becomes the big win game. The game control similar to the big hit based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening, such as being controlled to the state is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit, the small hit determination is executed, and when the determination result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes a small hit game. A special variable winning ball device for a small hit is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by a special variable winning ball device for small winning in a small winning game state and the game ball enters a special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, variable for big winning. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-type jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, a small winning time timer may be provided for measuring the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small winning time timer is a winning within the effective period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning to the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small winning time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the small winning game state is set, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. , You may make it resume time-measurement of the effective period of a small hit time timer. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the small winning game state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. good. For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of various timers based on control to the setting change state when the state is advantageous to the player, and stops various timers based on the termination of the setting change state. may be restarted.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbols results in a big win display result or a loss display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special design results in a big hit display, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state When the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special pattern is displaced and the display result is displayed, even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped. . In this manner, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player with respect to the big win display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, but the timer is stopped in order not to disadvantage the player with respect to the loss display result. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big win display result or a losing display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the loss display result, during the execution of the variable display of the loss, the pattern stop period was reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer. Sometimes, it may be made to stop the special figure fluctuation stop period timer.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or the set value is disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the setting value is advantageous to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, the various timers are started. You may choose not to stop.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions related to the characteristic portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set set values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker opening time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state, and the timing of the period of the attacker open time timer and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
A specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid for a game medium that has entered the specific area For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on that, restart the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 11F)
The characteristic portion 11F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set set values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew open time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. Stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer),
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state, and the timing of the period of the attacker open time timer and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
A specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid for a game medium that has entered the specific area For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on that, restart the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 12F)
The characteristic portion 12F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to shift to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Identification information (e.g., special design) variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display (e.g., CPU103 timed by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer),
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state, and the timing of the period of the attacker open time timer and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from the time the variable display of the identification information stops until the next variable display starts (for example, the CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer),
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is stopped. Resuming the timing of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started). Stop the timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer, and restart the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the start of the next variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on this, the expiration time of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 13F)
The characteristic portion 13F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set set values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived; ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker release time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state;
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from the time the variable display of the identification information stops until the next variable display starts (for example, the CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer),
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is stopped. Resuming the timing of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started). Stop the timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer, and restart the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the start of the next variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on this, the expiration time of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. Characteristic part 40F has the characteristic about the processing of the production control command during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Noise caused by static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In such a case, an effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 unintentionally. Processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 15-1 is a diagram illustrating an effect control command in the characteristic portion 40F in this embodiment. In FIG. 15-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 13-8(A) described above. The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of winning determination results such as jackpot type determination and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Among them, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will be made and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. Also, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results.

Various production control commands shown in FIG. 15-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103 . By receiving various production control commands, the production control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the production control CPU 120 based on the production control command will be explained.

(Regarding processing based on the variation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols, the image display device 5 may be provided with a regular small pattern in which the decoration pattern is reduced. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby always performing the variation display of the small symbols to be displayed.

(Regarding processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As patterns to be displayed in a variable manner, a decorative pattern, a special pattern, and a fourth pattern may be provided as the fourth pattern next to the normal pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first and second special patterns) are fluctuating. Is displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body completely or partially occupies the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a shielding effect is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current variable display is being performed. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command, thereby performing the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(Regarding the processing based on the specified command during the opening of the big prize mouth)
During the jackpot game, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in an open state based on the reception of the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening.

(Regarding processing based on the first start winning designation command and the second starting winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first starting opening winning designation command, thereby the first suspension information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. display a hold indication corresponding to In addition, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second starting opening winning designation command, so that the second effect stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 Display a pending display corresponding to the pending information.

(Regarding processing based on symbol designation command and variation type designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a win-time flash effect and a win-time pending change effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The win-time flash effect is a effect in which the lamps provided around the first start opening are illuminated when a start-up win occurs. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for flash performance at the time of winning on the basis of the degree of expectation of a big hit based on hold information by a symbol designating command or a variation type designating command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different mode depending on the degree of expectation. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control emits red light for a game with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, and emits white light for a game with a low degree of expectation. control is executed so that the lamp does not emit light. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a flash effect at the time of winning and a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only light is emitted and sound is not output.

The pending change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the usual mode. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a winning pending change performance on the basis of the degree of expectation for a big hit based on the pending information by a symbol designation command or a variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the pending display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, red, green, and blue are displayed in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big hit, and in the case of losing the lottery or a change in loss that does not involve reach, the suspension display is displayed in white in the normal mode. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation along with the winning pending change effect. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only the hold change does not output the sound.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. It should be noted that only one of the winning-time flash effect and the winning-time pending change effect may be executed. Also, when a prize is won, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting sound.

Next, the production control main processing executed in the characteristic portion 40F will be described. FIG. 15-2 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 40F. In FIG. 15-2, the same processes as in FIG. 13-43 are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is partially omitted. In FIG. 15-2, the processing relating to 207SGS413-207SGS415 and 207SGS417-207SGS424 in FIG.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). If the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the setting value is changed. Setting value-related notification processing for notifying that operation is in progress (setting value changing notification) or that setting values are being checked (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412). In the setting value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting change value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value related notification process in 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when an effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop the game. Processing is performed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 15-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412, and if the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y) goes to 207SGS427.

FIG. 15-3 is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic part 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command is received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command is received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby controlling the variable display of decorative patterns and the constant variable display of small patterns by operating the image display device 5. can be prevented from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning hole designation command is received. If it is determined that the first start winning hole designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the first pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning hole designation command is received. If it is determined that the command for specifying the second start winning opening has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the second pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received. If it is determined that the design designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the design designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the light emission of the lamp. Further, the effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby preventing execution of the winning pending change effect by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent execution of the pending change effect at the time of winning by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the test command is received. Here, the test command is a command that is sent directly to the effect control board 12 from a command sending device for checking the state of the screen and the state of the character that is provided in the game machine at the time of factory shipment. . When transmitting test commands, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to test command transmission is connected to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. If it is determined that the test command has been received, control according to the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this manner, processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, commands as shown in FIG. 15-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the process ends. If it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

(Regarding the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting change state, so that the variation pattern specification command Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state, so that the variation pattern specification command Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting change state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open specification command even if it receives the special winning opening open specification command when it is controlled in the setting change state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open designation command even if it receives the special winning opening open designation command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting change state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting change state, so based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 15-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command like 40FS021. In this way, even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning. Further, since information is not left by discarding the received command, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 15-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting is made to display an image notifying the setting change state, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. to display an image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set. In this way, it is possible to indicate that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5, etc. It is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 15-3, even when being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, control according to the test command is executed. In this way, the operation of the predetermined rendering means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command can be executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
Although the characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention can be applied to the present invention. included. Modifications of the characteristic portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is established. For example, an initialization command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if the production control command other than the command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, the processing based on the production control command is not executed. explained. However, the processing based on the fact that the production control command is received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be internally executed. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image is visually displayed according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. As for the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the channel other than the channel for outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the received command is executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, when it is controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the winning lamp have been described as predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be anything as long as the effect control means 120 executes it based on the reception of the command. For example, an operation means operated by a player or a movable member provided in a game machine may be used as the predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member moves due to the reception of a predetermined command, the command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if the command is executed, it is sufficient to execute control to discard the command.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than a command for terminating the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can control not to.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 may be controlled to operate, a lamp provided in the game machine may emit light, or a sound may be output from a speaker. In such a case, when a command related to the lamp or speaker is received, the command may be discarded so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command has been described. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when a command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern The advance notice effect may be executed based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command should be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed. Then, various advance notices may not be executed by judging that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of actually judging whether or not the advance notice can be executed. Also, when executing a pre-reading notice effect in continuous variable display other than when winning a prize, a notice lottery is executed based on receiving a symbol designation command or a change type command during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has ended at the timing when the notice is actually started, the notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, once an irregular command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a restriction is imposed so as not to receive another irregular command thereafter. good.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above (description of the characteristic portion 207SG), in a game machine capable of changing the set value, a variable display executed after being controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, a high base state) It is characterized in that the ratio of the selected variation pattern differs according to the number of times.

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 16-1 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referenced in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 16-1(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 determines the setting value (1 to 6 (either of the above) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table, and the big hit determination is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1, which is a random number value for special figure display result determination, is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 16-1 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol In the case of variable display, the probability of hitting the jackpot is lower (1/199.8) than when the set values are ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6''. to be elected. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/199.8) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-1 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of non-probability variation, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/188.3) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/188.3) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-1 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/178.1) than in the case of "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/178.1) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-1 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/164.7) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/164.7) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-1 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/149.3) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/149.3) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-1 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/134.0) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/134.0) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at the time when the variable display is started in the low probability state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 16-1 (A) to ( If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 16-1(A) to 16-1(F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

FIG. 16-2 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the high probability state. As shown in FIGS. 16-2(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided. (either of the above) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table, and the big hit determination is executed.

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol In the case of variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/50) than when the set values are ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6''. It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/47.1) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/47.1) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/44.5) than in the case of "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/44.5) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/41.2) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/41.2) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/37.3) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/37.3) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/33.5) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/33.5) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high-accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 14-2(A) to 14-2(F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2. The determination of the big hit may be performed using a common table for the case of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display regardless of the variation special symbol designating buffer. .

In this embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Judgement of jackpot type)
FIG. 16-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 16-3 (B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101 It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table (for the second special symbol). Of these, FIG. 16-3 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 16-3 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is set to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", "10R normal jackpot [50 times]", "10R normal jackpot [100 times]", It is a table referred to for determining any one of "3R probability variable jackpot [next time]", "5R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing part 21TM of this embodiment will be described. In the characteristic part 21TM of the present embodiment, as the jackpot types, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, and a "normal jackpot" (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability/high-base state, and a jackpot A "variable probability big hit" is set in which high probability control and time saving control are executed after the end of the game to shift to a high probability / high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "3R jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the big win game state by the "10R big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by "normal jackpot [50 times]" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, it ends by entering a jackpot game state, and the time saving control executed after the jackpot game state by "normal jackpot [100 times]" is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). is executed, or the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of "variable probability big win [next time]" are continuously executed until another big win occurs after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring jackpot is any of the types of "3R probability variable jackpot [next time]", "5R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]", the jackpot game state ends. Since the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again later, a so-called continuous game state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without passing through the normal state is established.

For example, the jackpot game state of "3R normal jackpot [50 times]" is a normal game in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. It is an open jackpot, shifts to a low-probability/high-base state after the jackpot game state ends, and the time-saving control executed after that is that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), Alternatively, it is a jackpot type that ends when a jackpot game state is entered before the predetermined number of special game games are executed. In addition, the jackpot game state by "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]" is a normal opening in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. It is a big win, and after the big win game state is ended, the state is shifted to a high accuracy/high base state, and the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after that are continued until the big win occurs again after the big win game state is ended. It is a jackpot type to be executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 21TM of the present embodiment, a form in which nine types are provided as the jackpot types is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types are eight or less, or ten More than one type may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Up to 176 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", 177 to 179 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", and 180 to 290 are assigned to "3R variable jackpot [next time ]”, 291 to 293 are assigned to “5R probability variation jackpot [next time]”, and 294 to 299 are assigned to “10R probability variation jackpot [next time]”. Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 134 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", 135 to 164 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", and 165 to 179 are assigned to "10R normal jackpot [100 times]”, 180 to 203 are assigned to “3R probability variable jackpot [next time]”, and 204 to 263 are assigned to “5R probability variable jackpot [next time]”, 294 ~ 299 are assigned to "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]". Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, regardless of which set value is set, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table. ing. Similarly, when a big win occurs in the special game with the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table regardless of which setting value is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the game state, a case where it is controlled to a low probability state and a low base state (low probability / low base state: normal state), a low probability state and a high base state (low probability / high base state) : Time saving state) and may be controlled to a high probability state and a high base state (high probability / high base state: variable probability state).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, when the high set value is within 50 fluctuations after the end of the big hit game (the The ratio of occurrence of the next big win in the first period) is higher than the ratio of occurrence of the next big win within 50 variations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is low. Further, when the big win game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the next big win does not occur after the big win game ends when the set value is high, and after 51 variations (second period). The rate of rushing into is lower than the rate of rushing into after 51 variation (second period) without generating the next big win after the end of the big win game when the set value is low.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, when the high set value is set, the next within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the big hit game. The rate of occurrence of the big win is higher than the rate of occurrence of the next big win within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is low. Further, when the big win game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, when the high set value is reached, the next big win does not occur after the end of the big win game, and after 101 variations (second period). The rate of rushing into is lower than the rate of rushing into after the 101 variation (second period) without the occurrence of the next big win after the end of the big win game when the set value is low.

(Relationship between game state and effect symbols and effect mode)
First, each game state (low probability / low base state: normal state, low probability / high base state: time saving state, high probability / high base state: variable state), each production pattern (decorative pattern, first small pattern, 2nd small pattern), and the relationship between each production mode (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols smaller than the decorative symbols displayed in the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5 indicate whether or not the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special symbols. is called a small pattern. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the first small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is variably displayed and stopped is displayed as the first small pattern display area 5l1, the first small pattern display area 5c1, and a first small pattern display area 5r1, and the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5 where the second small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is variably displayed and stopped is displayed from the left as a second small pattern display area 5l2, A second small pattern display area 5c2 and a second small pattern display area 5r2.

The first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern, and the visibility of the second small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 16-4 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to game states. In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are a case where the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and a case where the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. , which of the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display corresponds to which special symbol variable display the decorative symbol variable display is executed depends on the game state.

As the game state in the present embodiment, as described above, low probability / low base state (may be referred to as normal state) and low probability / high base state (may be referred to as time saving state), high probability / There is a high base state (sometimes referred to as a variable probability state). And, when the game state is controlled to (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the decoration design corresponds to the first special design. On the other hand, if the game state is controlled to (ii) low probability / high base state (time saving state), (iii) high probability / high base state (variable probability state), in which case Also, the decorative design corresponds to the second special design.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative design and the first small design are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and the second small design is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. However, in the case of (ii) to (iii), the decorative design and the second small design are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, and the first small design is the first special design. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, "Special Figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "Special Figure 10" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

In FIG. 16-4 (A), the game state is low probability / low base state (normal state), the decoration pattern and the first small pattern correspond to the first special pattern, and the second small pattern is the second It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when corresponding to a special design. In addition, in FIG. 16-1 (B), the game state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), the decorative pattern and the second small pattern correspond to the second special pattern, and the first small pattern is It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it respond|corresponds to a 1st special design. 16-4 (C1) and (C2), respectively, the game state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state), and the decoration pattern and the second small pattern correspond to the second special pattern 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first small symbol corresponds to the first special symbol; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16-4, the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a first pending display area 21TM011 for displaying the first pending storage number (0 to 4 first pending displays 21TM010). In the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a second pending display area 21TM021 for displaying the second pending storage number (0 to 4 second pending displays 21TM020) is provided. In addition, at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display 21TM030 is displayed which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed and information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed. An active display area 21TM031 is provided.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first reserved display area 21TM011). A second reserved memory count special display region 21TM025 for displaying the second reserved memory count is provided in the right part of the screen (above the second reserved memory display region 21TM021). As described above, the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 for displaying the first small patterns corresponding to the first special patterns. In the upper right part of the screen of the display device 5, second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 for displaying second small patterns corresponding to the second special patterns are provided.

Here, in the first reserved display area 21TM011, a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the number of first reserved memories are displayed, and in the second reserved display area 21TM021, objects corresponding to the number of second reserved memories are displayed. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the first reserved memory count special display area 21TM015, and the second reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the second reserved memory count special display region 21TM025. be. The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 21TM011 is wider than the numerical display range in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, and the first reserved memory number is displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011. It is displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 21TM015. In addition, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 21TM021 is wider than the numerical display range in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and the second reserved memory number is displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. 2 is displayed with higher visibility than the number of reserved memories special display area 21TM025.

Also, in the first reserved display area 21TM011, when the game state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed. (ii) low probability / high base state (time saving state) and (iii) high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the object itself is not displayed. Thus, objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number are displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011 according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, the first reserved memory number is displayed regardless of the game state (even when the game state is any one of (ii) to (iii)). Therefore, even when the player is in a game state (any of (ii) to (iii)) in which no object is displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011, the player can check the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, A first reserved memory number can be grasped.

Also, in the second reservation display area 21TM021, when the gaming state is in either state of (ii) low probability / high base state (time saving state) and (iii) high probability / high base state (variable probability state) , the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number is displayed, but when the game state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the objects themselves are not displayed. Thus, objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021 according to the game state. On the other hand, the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025 displays the second reserved memory count regardless of the game state (even when the game state is (i)). Therefore, even in the game state (i) where no object is displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021, the player can grasp the second reserved memory number by confirming the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025. can be done.

Also, in the active display area 21TM031, regardless of the game state, among the first special symbols and the second special symbols, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is displayed. ing.

The example shown in FIG. 16-4(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, a "daytime image" representing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative design.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 3 and the second reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "0" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three first A pending display 21TM010 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the first special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 the first small symbols (the 1 information corresponding to the special symbol) is being executed, and in response to the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing", the second The combination (in this example, "245") of the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" in the two small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 continues. are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 16-4(B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode of "chance time". When the production mode is "chance time", the background image of the decoration pattern is an "evening image" representing an evening landscape including the evening sky and mountains, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. will be displayed.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three second A pending display 21TM020 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first small symbols (sub (Information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a symbol) is being displayed, and the result of the variation display of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special symbol is "missing". Then, a combination (in this example, "134") of the first small patterns (information corresponding to the first special patterns) indicating that the variation display result is "miss" in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ) is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) is performed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

FIGS. 16-4 (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing screens of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state), respectively. As shown in FIG. 16-4 (C1), when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state, after the game state shifts to a high probability / high base state, a predetermined number of times (in this example, Until the special game is executed 50 times or 100 times), or until the big hit game state is reached before the special game is executed for the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is in a low probability / high base state (time saving state ), the production mode is controlled to "chance time". As described above, when the production mode is "chance time", the "evening image" representing the evening scenery including the evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Chance time" will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (C2), after the game state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state, a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) without becoming a jackpot game state. When the special game is executed, it is controlled to the production mode "FEVERZONE". When the production mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" representing a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative design, and "FEVERZONE" is displayed in the center of the screen. characters will be displayed.

In this embodiment, after the gaming state moves to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or the predetermined A period until the jackpot game state is reached before the number of special game is executed is referred to as a first period. In addition, after the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state, the period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without becoming a big hit game state (this In the example, after the 51st time or after the 101st time) is referred to as the second period.

In addition, after the game state moves to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or the predetermined number of special The period until the big win game state is reached before the game is executed is referred to as the first period as in the case of the high probability/high base state. On the other hand, after the game state shifts to the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this example) without entering the jackpot game state. The later period (in this example, the period after 51 times or after 101 times, and the period after the low probability/low base state (normal state)) is not referred to as the second period.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-4 (C1), when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three second A pending display 21TM020 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first small symbols (sub (Information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a symbol) is being displayed, and the result of the variation display of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special symbol is "missing". Then, a combination (in this example, "134") of the first small patterns (information corresponding to the first special patterns) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ) is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) is performed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-4 (C2), when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first small symbols (sub (Information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a symbol) is being displayed, and the result of the variation display of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special symbol is "missing". Then, a combination (in this example, "134") of the first small patterns (information corresponding to the first special patterns) indicating that the variation display result is "miss" in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ) is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) is performed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

In this embodiment, during the period (second period) during which the effect mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE", even when the number of second pending memories is 1 or more, the second pending display is displayed in the second pending display area 21TM021. 21TM020 is not displayed. Further, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) is not displayed in the active display area 21TM031. The square object itself indicating the active display area 21TM031 is also not displayed.

This is because, in the second period, the variation display with an extremely short variation display period (high-speed variation) continues until the variation display with the display result of "big hit" (variation display with a straight jackpot variation pattern) is executed. because it is executed. When such high-speed fluctuations are continuously executed, in order to ensure that the player recognizes the display result of each fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation), the variable display of the decoration pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is performed. It is necessary to draw attention to the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in which is executed. Therefore, in the second period, the pending display and the active display are not displayed, and the player's attention is directed to the display result of the currently executed variable display (high-speed fluctuation).

In addition, not limited to such a form, when the production mode is "chance time" (when it is the first period), the pending display or active display is not displayed, and when the production mode is "FEVERZONE" (first period) 2 periods), a pending display or an active display may be displayed.

(Game flow)
FIG. 16-5 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow of this embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of production modes (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) corresponding to the game state are provided, and the production control CPU 120 can control the plurality of production modes.

When the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) and the performance mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "3R normal jackpot". When any one of ``5R normal jackpot'', ``10R normal jackpot'', ``3R probability variable jackpot'', ``5R probability variable jackpot'', and ``10R probability variable jackpot'' is achieved, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is changed to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". Further, when the result of the variable display is any one of "3R probability variable big win", "5R probability variable big win" and "10R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the game state is high probability/high base state. (probability variable state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

When the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time saving state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time", the variable display is started and the display result of the variable display is "3R normal jackpot". , ``5R normal jackpot'', ``10R normal jackpot'', ``3R probability variable jackpot'', ``5R probability variable jackpot'', and ``10R probability variable jackpot'', it is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is changed to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". Further, when the result of the variable display is any one of "3R probability variable big win", "5R probability variable big win" and "10R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the game state is high probability/high base state. (probability variable state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

When the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the performance mode is controlled to "chance time", the variable display is started and the display result of the variable display is "3R normal big hit". , ``5R normal jackpot'', ``10R normal jackpot'', ``3R probability variable jackpot'', ``5R probability variable jackpot'', and ``10R probability variable jackpot'', control is made to the jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is changed to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". Further, when the result of the variable display is any one of "3R probability variable big win", "5R probability variable big win", and "10R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the game state is high probability / high base state. (probability variable state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

From when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state) and the production mode is controlled to the "chance time" until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example). When no big hit occurs, the game state shifts from the low probability/high base state (time saving state) to the low probability/low base state (normal state), and the performance mode shifts from the chance time to the normal mode. .

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time") a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of special symbols By the end of the variable display, the variable display results of the special symbols are "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variable jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and "10R probability variable jackpot". , the game state shifts to a low accuracy/low base state (or the game state changes to a high A suggesting effect (in this example, a continuous challenge effect of a failure mode) is executed. Then, at the timing when the variation display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) ends, the game state falls from the low probability/high base state (time saving state) to the low probability/low base state (normal state). From the fluctuation display of , the production mode becomes the normal mode.

From when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) When no big hit occurs in , the high probability/high base state (variable probability state) continues, and the presentation mode shifts from ``chance time'' to ``FEVERZONE''.

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time") a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of special symbols By the end of the variable display, the variable display results of the special symbols are "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variable jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and "10R probability variable jackpot". , the game state is the high accuracy/high base state and the high accuracy/high base state is maintained in response to the predetermined number of times (the 50th or 100th time) of the variable display. (or that the game state shifts to the low-probability/low-base state). Even after the variable display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) continues, and the production mode becomes "FEVERZONE" from the next variable display.

In this way, since the game state is controlled to the low probability / high base state (time saving state), until the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) is executed, or the predetermined number of times The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the jackpot game state is reached before the special game is executed. Also, since the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), until the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) is executed, or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the jackpot game state is reached before the game is executed.

That is, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), whichever Since the production mode is controlled to "chance time" even in the game state of , the common "evening image" will be displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common "chance time" characters will be displayed at the top of the screen. will be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), the second It becomes possible to share the performance of one period, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the currently controlled game state. In addition, even when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), by giving the player a sense of expectation that the game state is a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the game state It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when is in the low probability/low base state (time saving state).

(Variation pattern determination)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, there is a variation pattern determination table for losing, which is used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss", and the variable display result is a "big hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table referred to when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) A variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the For each game state, a variation pattern determination table for losing used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "loss" and when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "big hit" It is assumed that a big hit variation pattern determination table to be used is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss", and the fluctuation of "super reach loss" A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the pattern.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display period is 1 second when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)", and when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)" The variable display period is 5 seconds, the variable display period is 30 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be "normal reach out", and the variable display period is 60 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach out". seconds.

The fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" and the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)" do not establish reach after the fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display result is "loss". It is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that is stopped and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display period is 5 seconds when it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)", whereas it is determined to be a "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern. Since the fluctuation display period is 1 second, when there is a pending memory, when it is determined as a fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)", it is regarded as a fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)". It becomes possible to consume the reserved memory at shorter intervals than when it is determined.

In the big hit variation pattern determination table, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is set for each variation pattern of the "direct jackpot" variation pattern, the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, and the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern. A predetermined random value within a possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

In this embodiment, the variation display period is 10 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be a "straight hit", and the variation display period is 30 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach jackpot". The variation display period is 60 seconds when the variation pattern is determined as "super reach jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of "direct jackpot" is a variation in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the result of the variation display is a "jackpot" is displayed in a stopped state after the start of the variation display, without reaching the establishment of the reach. It's a pattern. Since the production that achieves reach is not executed, the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "straight hit" variation pattern is the other fluctuation that executes the production that establishes reach when the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It is shorter than the variable display period of the patterns ("normal reach jackpot", "super reach jackpot").

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving normal reach ("normal reach lost" and "normal reach big hit"), after the reach state is established, the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. It is fixed and stopped.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving super reach ("super reach failure" and "super reach big hit"), after the reach state is established, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed as a super reach effect. A battle effect is executed to inform whether or not a big hit is won. When the final display result is "big win" (when the big win pattern is confirmed and stopped), an effect is executed in which the friendly character wins over the enemy character, and when the final display result is "losing" (losing pattern). is fixed and stopped), an effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

FIG. 16-6(A) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. This first period [excluding the final variation] is the first period (the period of 50 special symbols games after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes a "jackpot", or the period of the second special symbol From the period of 100 special games after the variation display result is "big hit") to the final variation of the first period described above (in this example, the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit") The period excluding the 50th special game after the second special symbol, or the 100th special game after the second special symbol variation display result is a "jackpot") (that is, the first special symbol variation display The period of 49 special games after the result is a "big hit", or the period of 99 special games after the second special symbol fluctuation display result is a "big hit") be. Here, in FIG. 16-6 (A), FIG. 16-6 (A1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 16-6 (A2) is a variation pattern determination for big hit It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the first period [excluding the final variation] when the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the first period when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [Excluding the final variation], when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "loss", the variation pattern determination table for common [loss] in any game state (Fig. 16-6 (A1) ), the variation pattern will be determined. In addition, the first period [excluding the final variation] when the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the first period when the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) When the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be a "jackpot" with [excluding the final variation], the variation pattern determination table for [for jackpot] common in any gaming state (Fig. 16-6 (A2) ), the variation pattern will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (A1), in the variation pattern determination table for loss, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 750 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " 751 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss". It is Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 750 are assigned to the variation pattern of "non-reach deviation (shortened variation)", and 751 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", and 901 ~ Up to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out". In this way, in the first period excluding the final variation, when the display result is "no", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (A2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 20 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " 21 to 50 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 51 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 20 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" variation pattern, 21 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of Reach Jackpot. In this way, in the first period excluding the final variation, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

FIG. 16-6(B) is a variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation]. This first period [final variation] is the final variation of the first period described above (in this example, the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is a "jackpot", or It means the 100th special symbol game after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit"). Here, of FIG. 16-6 (B), FIG. 16-6 (B1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 16-6 (B2) is a variation pattern determination for big hit It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) And, when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "missing", the variation pattern based on the common [loss] variation pattern determination table (FIG. 16-6 (B1)) in any gaming state will be determined. Also, the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) Then, when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "big hit", the variation pattern is based on the common [for big hit] variation pattern determination table (Fig. 16-6 (B2)) in any game state will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (B1), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, if the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 will be described later. It is assigned to the variation pattern of “suggestion effect (disappearance)”. Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "suggestive effect (loss)". In this way, when the display result is "mismatch" in the final variation of the first period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (B2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " It is assigned to the variation pattern of "suggestive production (jackpot)". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "suggestive effect (big hit)". In this way, when the display result is "big hit" in the final variation of the first period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

The suggestive effect is a effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues), and whether or not to transition from the first period to the second period ( Whether or not the high base state of the game state continues) is an effect for informing. In this embodiment, as shown in later-described FIGS. 16-13, a continuous challenge effect is executed as a suggestive effect.

In the continuous challenge effect, as shown in later-described FIGS. 16-13, the characters "continuous challenge" and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B are displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed, and a character 21TM300 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B. It has become.

When the currently controlled game state is the low probability/high base state (time saving state), in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, A continuous challenge presentation of the failure mode is executed, the characters "failure" and the object "?" are displayed in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state) by displaying the character "failure" or the object indicating "?" on the image display device 5 suggesting that the continuous challenge effect has failed. The player is informed of what to do.

When the currently controlled game state is a high probability/high base state (variable probability state), in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, A continuous challenge presentation of the success mode is executed, the characters "success" and the object "o" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. By displaying on the image display device 5 the characters "success" or an object indicating "○" indicating that the continuous challenge effect was successful, the continuous challenge effect is successful and the game state is high certainty/high. The player is informed that the base state (probability variable state) will continue.

FIG. 16-6(C) is a variation pattern determination table for the second period. This second period is, as described above, after the game state shifts to the high probability/high base state, the special figure of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state. It is a period after the game is executed (in this example, after the 51st time or after the 101st time). Here, of FIG. 16-6 (C), FIG. 16-6 (C1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 16-6 (C2) is a variation pattern determination for big hit It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, in the second period when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), when the determination result at the start of the fluctuation is determined to be "missing", the [for losing] variation pattern determination table ( A variation pattern is determined based on FIG. 16-6 (C1)). Also, in the second period when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), when the determination result at the start of the fluctuation is determined to be a "big hit", the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table ( A variation pattern is determined based on FIG. 16-6 (C2)). On the other hand, if the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for the second period (Fig. 16-6 (C1), (C2)) not.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (C1), in the deviation variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach (high-speed fluctuation)". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)". As described above, when the display result is "mismatch" in the second period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (C2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " It is assigned to the variation pattern of "straight hit". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6", the MR3 determination value is the same as when the setting value is "1". Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "straight hit". Thus, in the second period, when the display result is "big hit", a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

(Variation pattern determination table referenced after special figure 1 jackpot)
In FIG. 16-7 (A1), the variable display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the game state is low after the jackpot game ends. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when shifting to the definite/high base state (time saving state) and the execution timing of each effect. In FIG. 16-7 (A2), the variation display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", and the game state is high after the end of the big hit game. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when shifting to the definite/high base state (variable definite state) and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A1), when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", a big hit is achieved. After the game is over, the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time saving state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) in the period of 49 times of the special-design game after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(A).

Next, in the 50th special symbol game after the variable display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(B). At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production in a failure mode. After the variable display ends, the game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Then, in the 51st and later special symbol games after the variable display result of the first special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13-23 and 13-24.

As shown in FIG. 16-7 (A2), when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", a big hit After the game is over, the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) in the period of 49 times of the special symbol game after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(A).

Next, in the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the success mode. Then, even after the variable display ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is continued.

Then, in the 51st and later special symbol games after the variable display result of the first special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period shown in FIG. 16-6(C).

(Variation pattern determination table referenced after special figure 10 jackpot)
In FIG. 16-8 (B1), the variation display result of the second special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the game state is low after the jackpot game ends. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when shifting to the definite/high base state (time saving state) and the execution timing of each effect. In FIG. 16-8 (B2), the variation display result of the second special symbol is one of “3R probability variable big hit”, “5R probability variable big hit”, and “10R probability variable big hit”, and the game state is high after the end of the big hit game. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when moving to the definite/high base state (variable definite state) and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 16-8 (B1), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", a big hit is achieved. After the game is over, the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time saving state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) in the period of 99 special-design games after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(A).

Next, in the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(B). At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production in a failure mode. After the variable display ends, the game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Then, in the 101st and later special symbol games after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13-23 and 13-24.

As shown in FIG. 16-8 (B2), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", a big hit After the game is over, the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) in the period of 99 times of the special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(A).

Next, in the 100th special symbol game after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 16-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the success mode. Then, even after the variable display ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is continued.

Then, in the 101st and later special symbol games after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period shown in FIG. 16-6(C).

As shown in Figure 16-6, the deviation pattern determination table for each period (1st period [excluding final fluctuation], 1st period [final fluctuation], and 2nd period) is common regardless of the set value is.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display period is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds) The rate at which a certain "normal reach out" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] fluctuation pattern determination table (See FIG. 16-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) as the variation pattern is the judgment value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 751 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", so [{(900−751+1)/997}×100=15%].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is the judgment value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach out”, so [{(997−901+1)/997}×100=10%].

Therefore, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) The rate at which the period "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is [15+10=25%].

Also, in the second period, when the variable display result is "loss", the variation pattern is "normal reach failure", which is a variable display period longer than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). ” (variation display period is 30 seconds) or “super reach loss” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected, the variation pattern determination table for loss in the second period (see FIG. 16-6 (C1)) can be calculated based on

In the second period, when the variable display result is "loss", "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern. The ratio is [(0/997)×100=0%] because none of the MR3 decision value ranges from 1 to 997 are assigned.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display period is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds) The rate at which a certain "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is [15 + 10 = 25%], whereas the second period , when the variable display result is "loss", the variation pattern is "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) longer than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) or The rate at which “super reach out” (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [(0/997)×100=0%]. Thus, in the first period, "normal reach loss" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach The rate of selection of "missing" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is higher than in the second period.

Also, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display is shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) The rate of selection of the period "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is the loss fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (Fig. 16-6 (A1 ))).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the ratio of "non-reach loss (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, Since no determination value is assigned in the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, [(0/997)×100=0%].

Also, in the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the variation pattern is "non-reach", which is a variation display period shorter than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selection of “loss (high-speed fluctuation)” (variation display period is 1 second) can be calculated based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation for the second period (see FIG. 16-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "non-reach failure (fast variation)" (variation display period is 1 second) as the variation pattern is within the range of the judgment value of MR3. Of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "non-reach deviation (high-speed variation)", so [{(997−1+1)/997}×100=100%].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display period is shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds) The rate of selecting a certain "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is [0%], while the fluctuation display result is "loss" in the second period. At times, the rate at which "non-reach loss (fast fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) is selected is [100%]. In this way, in the second period, "non-reach out (fast fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second), which is a shorter fluctuation display period than "non-reach out (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) ) is selected more frequently than in the first period.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 16-6, each period (1st period [excluding final fluctuation], 1st period [final fluctuation], and 2nd period) The big hit fluctuation pattern determination table is set to the set value It is common regardless.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot", which is a longer variation display period than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds) '' (variation display period is 60 seconds) can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 16-6 (A2)) for the first period [excluding the final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is the judgment value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 51 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot", so [{(997−51+1)/997}×100=95%].

Further, in the second period, when the result of the variation display is "big hit", the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), which is a longer variation display period than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). Period 60 seconds) can be calculated based on the second period big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 16-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. Since none of the determination values is assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [(0/997)×100=0%].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot", which is a longer variation display period than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds) ” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [95%]. ” (variation display period is 30 seconds), the rate of selecting “super reach jackpot” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is [0%]. Thus, in the first period, the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds), which is a longer variable display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is second. higher than the period.

Also, in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). The ratio of selecting "big hit" (variation display period is 10 seconds) can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 16-6 (A2)) for the first period [excluding the final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is a "jackpot", the percentage of the variation pattern "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected as the judgment value of MR3. Since 1 to 20 in the range 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "straight hit", it is [{(20-1+1)/997}×100=2%].

Also, in the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), which is a shorter variation display period than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) can be calculated based on the second period big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 16-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) as the variation pattern is out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. , none of the judgment values are assigned to the variation pattern of "straight hit", so [{(997−1+1)/997}×100=100%].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is "direct jackpot", which is a variation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). (10 seconds of variable display period) is selected is [2%], while in the second period, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is "normal reach big hit". The rate at which the “direct jackpot” (variation display period is 10 seconds) shorter than (variation display period is 30 seconds) is selected is [100%]. Thus, in the second period, the rate of selecting the "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds), which is a shorter variation display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is the same as in the first period. is higher than

In this way, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period longer than the predetermined variation display period is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the predetermined variation When the game state is in a high accuracy/high base state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern whose variation display period is shorter than the variation display period is higher than in the first period [excluding the final variation]. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the game machine in which the setting can be changed in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high accuracy/high base state, a high setting value (for example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6") In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the set value is set to a low set value (for example, the set value is “1” to “3”). It has become. Therefore, when a high set value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big win is less than when the low set value is set, and the next big win can be won at short time intervals. become. As a result, the probability that the interval between occurrences of big wins will be excessively shortened increases, so that the gambling nature becomes excessively high, and a problem arises in that a sound gaming nature cannot be realized.

However, in this embodiment, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting a variation pattern having a variation display period longer than a predetermined variation display period is higher than in the second period. As a result, even if the set value is set to a high value (for example, the set value is set to "4" to "6"), the time to win the big win when the game state is the high probability/high base state. It is possible to make the interval relatively long (prevent it from being excessively short), suppress gambling from becoming excessively high, and realize healthy game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is a high accuracy / high base state, if the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), a high set value (For example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the set value is set to a low value, the number of fluctuations required until the next big win is won is greater than when the set value is set to a high value, and the big win is won at long time intervals. However, there is a problem that the user loses interest in the game.

However, in this embodiment, in the second period, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern having a shorter variation display period than the predetermined variation display period is higher than in the first period [excluding the final variation]. As a result, even when the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is set to "1" to "3"), the time required to win the jackpot when the game state is the high probability/high base state. It is possible to make the interval relatively short (prevent it from being excessively long), thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, in the variation patterns involving super reach ("super reach failure" and "super reach big hit"), after the reach state is established, the friend character and the enemy character is executing a battle performance for informing whether or not a jackpot is won by performing a battle.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "losing", the ratio of "super reach losing" selected as the fluctuation pattern is It can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 16-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "missing", the ratio of selecting "super reach missing" as the variation pattern is: Since 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out", it is [{(997-901+1)/997}×100=10%].

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "super reach failure" as the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determination table for failure of the second period (FIG. 16-6 (C1) ) can be calculated based on

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "super reach failure" as the variation pattern is " It is [(0/997)×100=0%] because it is not assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach lost".

As shown in Figure 16-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the percentage of "super reach failure" selected as the fluctuation pattern is [10%], as shown in FIG. The selected percentage is [0%]. Thus, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting the "super reach out" fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of selecting the "super reach out" fluctuation pattern in the second period getting higher. That is, the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the second period.

Similarly, in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach jackpot" as the variation pattern is the first period [excluding the final variation] It can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 16-6 (A2)).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of "super reach jackpot" selected as the variation pattern is: Since 51 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [{(997-51+1)/997}×100=95%].

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern is the second period big hit variation pattern determination table (Fig. 16-6 (C2) ) can be calculated based on

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern is " It is [(0/997)×100=0%] because it is not assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach lost".

As shown in Figure 16-6 (A2), in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the percentage of "super reach jackpot" selected as the variation pattern is [95%], while in the second period, as shown in FIG. The selected percentage is [0%]. In this way, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern is higher than the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern in the second period getting higher. That is, the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the second period.

Thus, the execution ratio of the battle effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game within a predetermined period (first period) from the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in the second period after a predetermined period (first period) has passed since the end of the jackpot game state, the execution ratio of the battle effect is reduced, so that the variable display period is shortened. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the fact that the next big hit does not occur despite being controlled to the state (probability variable state).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a high accuracy/high base state, if a high setting value (for example, the setting value is "4" to "6"), a low setting value (For example, when the setting value is set to "1" to "3"), the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5). Therefore, when a high set value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big win is less than when the low set value is set, and the next big win can be won at short time intervals. become. As a result, the probability that the interval between occurrences of big wins will be excessively shortened increases, so that the gambling nature becomes excessively high, and a problem arises in that a sound gaming nature cannot be realized.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect during the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect during the second period. As a result, even if the set value is set to a high value (for example, the set value is "4" to "6"), the first period [final Excluding fluctuations], the rate of selection of fluctuation patterns with super reach with a longer fluctuation display period than in the second period is high, so the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively long (not excessively short It is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, thereby realizing a healthy game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is a high accuracy / high base state, if the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), a high set value (For example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the set value is set to a low value, the number of fluctuations required until the next big win is won is greater than when the set value is set to a high value, and the big win is won at long time intervals. However, there is a problem that the user loses interest in the game.

However, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect during the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect during the second period. As a result, even when the setting value is set to a low value (for example, the setting value is "1" to "3"), when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state, in the second period, Since the rate of selection of variation patterns with super reach that has a longer variation display period than the first period [excluding the final variation] is low, the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively short (not excessively long It is possible to prevent it from happening), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Cut-in notice effect)
Next, an example of executing a notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state will be described. In this example, a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in FIGS. 16-12 (2), (3) and (4) to be described later, when reach is established in the image display device 5, the push button 31B is pressed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate is displayed. When the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, a cut-in notice effect is executed, and " Cut-in images (cut-in image 21TM200A, cut-in image 21TM200B) displaying the characters "chance" are displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

In this example, the characters displayed in the cut-in image are the characters "chance" as the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, and the ratio of whether or not to execute is selected depends on the display result (Fig. 16- 10 (B)) example is shown, but not limited to this, there are a plurality of presentation modes ("Chance", "Fever", etc.) with different displayed characters, and each presentation mode is displayed according to the display result. may be selected in different proportions.

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect, etc. (reach effect, etc.) is being displayed, a display mode (display layer is higher than the image related to the other effect, etc.) suddenly appears. (and appears to be displayed on the nearer side than images related to other effects, etc.). In addition, in the case of a configuration capable of executing a plurality of presentation modes, the player is also interested in which of the plurality of presentation modes the cut-in announcement presentation is performed.

(Setting suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the setting value designation command for designating the set value executes the effect corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.

In this example, the set value is suggested to the player by changing the mode of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed according to the specified set value. Execute the first setting suggestion effect. When the first setting suggesting effect is not executed, no effect image is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. When the first setting suggestion effect is executed, effect images are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggestive effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). be done. That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design.

Modes of effect images displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the first setting suggestion effect is executed include a white mode, a blue mode, and a red mode. In this example, when the first setting suggesting effect in the white mode is executed, effect images emitting white light are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and when the first setting suggesting effect in the blue mode is executed. , an effect image emitting blue light is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and when the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is executed, an effect image emitting red light is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. indicate.

Further, in this example, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the designated setting value, so that the player can see the set value. A second setting suggestion effect that suggests is executed. When the cut-in announcement effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, the cut-in image in the normal mode is displayed. The cut-in image in the normal mode is a cut-in image in which the character "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in white characters. When the cut-in announcement effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed, a cut-in image in blue mode or red mode is displayed. The cut-in image in blue mode is a cut-in image in which the characters "chance" displayed in the cut-in image are displayed in blue characters, and the cut-in image in red mode is a cut-in image. This is a cut-in image in which the characters "chance" displayed in the image are displayed in red characters.

(Production decision processing at the time of fluctuation start)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and variable display period and effect content of special symbols (Reach and super reach, etc.) to designate a variation pattern designation command, based on the fact that received one set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103), that the variation display of the special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to specify the variable display period of the special symbol and the contents of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 16-9 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this fluctuation start effect determination process, whether or not to execute each of the first setting suggestive effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the second set suggestive effect and the mode of execution thereof are determined. In the following description, the game state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state) and the first period (50 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, 100 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 10 jackpot) (Period), "the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [first period]", the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the second The state (period) in which the period (51 or more fluctuations from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, 101 fluctuations or more from the end of the special figure 10 jackpot) is defined as "the game state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [second period] There is a case.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands (reserved memory number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command) associated with the start of variable display of special symbols , production control pattern (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production A collection of data) is set, and the effect to be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 16-9.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether (i) the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period ] (step S21TM1000). (i) If the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (step YES in S21TM1000), the process proceeds to step S21TM1010 and thereafter. On the other hand, if (i) the gaming state is not the low probability/high base state (time saving state) and (ii) the gaming state is not the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (step S21TM1000 NO), and proceeds to step S21TM1070 and thereafter.

Here, when the game state is a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) [first period], a big win occurs after the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). It is within the first period until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example). Also, if the game state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [second period], after the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state, a predetermined number of times ( In this example, it is the second period (51st or 101st in this example) after the 50th or 100th special game has been executed.

Then, the effect control CPU120, (i) if the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) gaming state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period ] (YES in step S21TM1000), the execution/non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 16-10(A)). (Step S21TM1010) and proceed to Step S21TM1020.

As shown in FIG. 16-10(A), in the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect, a determination is made for determining whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode according to the set value. value is assigned. When the setting value is "1" or "2" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1" or "2"), the first setting suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 90%. decided not to execute, decided to execute the first set suggestion effect in the white mode at a rate of 5%, decided to execute the first set suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 3%, It is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 2%. Further, when the setting value is "3" or "4" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "3" or "4"), 90% of the first setting Decided not to execute the suggestive effect, decided to execute the first set suggested effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and decided to execute the first set suggested effect in the blue mode at a rate of 5%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 3%. Further, when the setting value is "5" or "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "5" or "6"), 90% of the first setting It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, it is decided to execute the first set suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and the first set suggestive effect in the blue mode is determined to be executed at a rate of 3%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 5%.

Thus, when the set value is "1" or "2", the effect mode of the first set suggestion effect when the first set suggestion effect is executed is the first set suggestion effect in the white mode. is the highest (5%), the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is the second highest (3%), and the ratio of the execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is the lowest ( 2%). Further, when the set value is "3" or "4", the effect mode of the first set suggestion effect when the first set suggestion effect is executed is the blue mode first set suggestion effect. The percentage is the highest (5%), the percentage of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is the second highest (3%), and the percentage of the execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is the lowest (2%). ). Further, when the set value is "5" or "6", the effect mode of the first set suggestion effect when the first set suggestion effect is executed is the red mode first set suggestion effect. The ratio is the highest (5%), the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is the second highest (3%), and the ratio of the execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is the lowest (2%). ).

That is, the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is a common rate (10% in this example) regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference, but the first setting of each effect mode Regarding the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed, when the setting is low (set value is "1" or "2"), the rate at which the first set suggestive effect in the white mode is selected is high, and when the setting is intermediate (set value is '3' or '4'), the percentage of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is high, and when the setting is high (the set value is '5' or '6'), the first setting suggestion in the red mode The ratio of performance execution is high. Therefore, the player will be interested in the effect mode when the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is "super reach out" or "super reach big hit" (step S21TM1020). If the variation pattern is "super reach loss" or "super reach big hit" (YES in step S21TM1020), whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed is determined in the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution determination table (Fig. 16-10 ( B)) (step S21TM1030), and proceed to step S21TM1040. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not "Super Reach Lost" or "Super Reach Big Win" (NO in step S21TM1020), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 16-10B, in the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution decision table, a determination value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned according to the display result. 20, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), 80% of the time, cut-in notice effect is not executed; It is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect at the rate of %. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%. and decides to execute the cut-in announcement effect at a rate of 60%. In this way, when the cut-in foretelling effect is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the cut-in foretelling effect is not executed. Therefore, the player will be interested in whether or not the cut-in announcement effect will be executed.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in announcement effect (step S21TM1040). If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S21TM1040), the execution/non-execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are set in the second setting suggestion effect execution/non-execution determination table (Fig. 16- 10(C)) (step S21TM1050), and the process ends. If it has been decided not to execute the cut-in announcement effect (NO in step S21TM1040), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 16-10(C), in the execution/non-execution determination table for the second setting suggestion effect, a determination is made for determining whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode according to the set value. value is assigned. When the setting value is "1", "3", or "5" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1", "3", or "5"), 30% of the decisions are made not to execute the second setting suggestion effect, 50% of decisions are made to execute the second setting suggestion effect of the blue mode, and 20% of the decision is made to execute the second setting of the red mode. It decides to execute the suggestive production. Also, when the setting value is "2", "4", or "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "2", "4", or "6") decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 20%, and decides to perform the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the 1 setting suggestion effect.

In this way, when the set value is "1", "3", or "5", with respect to the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the blue mode second The ratio of executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than the ratio of executing the second setting suggesting effect of the red mode. Further, when the set value is "2", "4", or "6", the second setting suggestion in the red mode is displayed with respect to the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed. The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect of the blue mode is executed. That is, the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect is executed is a common rate (30% in this example) regardless of the setting value, and there is no setting difference, but the second setting of each effect mode With respect to the ratio at which the suggestive effect is executed, when the odd number is set (the set value is "1", "3", or "5"), the ratio at which the second set suggestive effect in the blue mode is selected is the second in the red mode. Higher than the ratio of selecting the 2-setting suggesting effect, and when the even number is set (the set value is "2", "4", or "6"), the ratio of executing the second setting suggesting effect of the blue mode is red. It is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect of the aspect is selected. Therefore, the player will be interested in the effect mode when the second setting suggestion effect is executed.

Also, (i) the gaming state is not a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and (ii) the gaming state is not a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (step S21TM1000 NO), (iii) It is determined whether the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (step S21TM1060). (iii) If the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070. (iii) If the gaming state is not the high-probability/high-base state [second period] (NO in step S21TM1060), the process ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (step S21TM1070). If the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the execution/non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are set in the execution/non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (Fig. 16-10 ( (see A)) (step S21TM1080), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display is not a "big hit" (NO in step S21TM1070), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 16-9, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect ( step S21TM1020). That is, when the game state is the high probability/high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), only when the variation display result is "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the first It is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S21TM1020). That is, when the gaming state is the high-probability/high-base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final fluctuation of the second period when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot". ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect is 10% regardless of the set value (see FIG. 16-10(A)). As described above, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result. The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of each variable display in the first period is 10%. On the other hand, as described above, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variation of the second period. , In the second period, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 0% up to the last variation display where the variation display result is "big hit", and the final variation display result is "big hit". The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of variation is 10%.

For example, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "probability variable big hit", after the game state shifts to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit game, 100 special symbols When the jackpot gaming state does not occur until the game is executed, the first period is 100 times, and whether or not the first setting suggestion performance is executed for each variation display in the first period (100 rotations). Since it is determined whether or not, the probability that the first setting suggestion effect is executed is [{1-(90/100)̂100}×100=99.9%]. On the other hand, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "probability variation big hit", in the second period (after 101st time) after 100 special game games have been executed without entering the big win gaming state. Since it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed only in the final variation of the second period when the display result is "big win", the final variation in the second period may be any number of revolutions. Also, the probability that the first setting suggestion effect is executed is [(10/100)×100=10%]. In this way, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period, so that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state ) can improve the amusement of the game during the period controlled by

As shown in FIG. 16-9, if the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES at step S21TM1000), it is decided at step S21TM1010 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. In step S21TM1050, it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-9, if the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES at step S21TM1060), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed at step S21TM1080. have decided. Thus, in the first period, two types of setting suggesting effects, the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, are executed, and in the second period, one type of setting suggesting effect, only the first setting suggesting effect, is executed. is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the period in which the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state).

Also, when the fluctuation display result is "loss", as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], "super reach loss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The ratio is [{(997−901+1)/997}×100=10%, since 901 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of “super reach out”. ]. On the other hand, when the variation display result is "loss", as shown in FIG. Since none of the judgment values within the judgment value range of 1 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach out”, [(0/997)×100=0%]. That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern accompanied by super reach (“loss of super reach”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern accompanied by super reach (“loss of super reach”) in the second period. .

Also, when the variation display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A2), in the first period [excluding the final variation], "super reach jackpot" is selected as the variation pattern. The percentage is [{(997−51+1)/997}×100=95%, since 51 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997 are assigned to the “super reach jackpot” variation pattern. ]. On the other hand, when the variation display result is a "big hit", the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" as the variation pattern when the variation display result is a "big hit" in the second period is determined by MR3. Since none of the determination values in the range of values 1 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [(0/997)×100=0%]. That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach jackpot") in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach jackpot") in the second period. .

Further, as described above, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period. Thus, between the first period and the second period, the selection ratio of the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach miss", "super reach jackpot") is different, and between the first period and the second period, the Since the execution ratio of the 1-setting suggestion effect is different, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the period when the game state is controlled to the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state).

(Specific example of the first setting suggestion effect)
Next, specific examples of the first setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-11 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3). 16-11 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is executed in the first period, FIGS. 16-11 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the blue mode first setting suggestion effect is executed in the second period.

(First setting suggestion effect in the first period)
As shown in FIG. 16-11 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period], the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to chance time It is When the production mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "off", The combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (A2), at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect in the white mode, and displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L. 2”, the decorative pattern “4” is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern “5” is stopped in the pattern display area 5R, and the effect images illuminated in white are respectively displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 21TM100A is displayed. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggestive effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). do. That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second small symbols in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (A3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect image 21TM100A displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. is erased to end the first setting suggesting effect, and the decorative pattern "2" is displayed in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "4" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "5" is displayed in the pattern display area 5R. The second small symbol "2" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2. The symbol "5" is fixed and stopped.

(First setting suggestion effect in the second period)
As shown in FIG. 16-11 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [second period], the production mode is set to "FEVERZONE" by the production control CPU 120 controlled. When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative design, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. is executed, and in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small design (information corresponding to the second special design) is displayed variably, In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "off", The combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (B2), at the timing when the variable display of decorative symbols ends, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the first setting of the blue mode in response to the display result being a "jackpot". The performance is executed, and the decorative pattern "7" is stopped in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "7" in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "7" in the pattern display area 5R, and the pattern display area 5L is stopped. , 5C and 5R respectively display the effect image 21TM100B emitting blue light. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggestive effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). do. That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second small symbols in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

As shown in FIG. 16-11 (B3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect image 21TM100B displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. is erased to terminate the first setting suggesting effect, and the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5R. The second small symbol "7" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "7" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2. The symbol "7" is fixed and stopped.

(Specific example of the second setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the second setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-12 (1) to (4). FIGS. 16-12 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. 16-12 (1), (2), and (4) are explanatory diagrams, and are displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in announcement effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image;

As shown in FIG. 16-12 (1), when the game state is controlled to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [first period], the production mode is controlled to chance time by the production control CPU 120 It is When the production mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "off", The combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-12 (2), the effect control CPU 120 puts "5" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters of "reach!!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the second small symbols continues in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. That is, in the first small pattern display area 5l1 corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the first small pattern display area 5r1 corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, The first small pattern is continuously variably displayed without being stopped and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B at the center of the screen while continuing the ready-to-win state. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B. It has become. Since the operation prompting display 21TM150 is an image with a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher), the player will feel that it is displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern. appear.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed. Here, when it is determined in the fluctuation start effect determination process that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not to be executed, the cut-in notice effect is executed, but the second setting suggestion effect is executed. does not run. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the second set suggestion effect is executed together with the cut-in notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-12 (3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed. However, the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. In this example, the cut-in image 21TM200A in the normal mode (the cut-in image in which white characters "Chance" are displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 16-12 (4), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed. is executed, and the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, a cut-in image 21TM200B in a red mode (a cut-in image in which red characters "Chance" are displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

(Specific example of continuous challenge production)
Next, specific examples of continuous challenge effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-13 (1) to (7). FIGS. 16-13 (1) and (2) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode is executed. 16-13 (1) and (5) to (7) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed.

As shown in FIG. 16-13 (1), the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the When the 100th special symbol game after the variable display result of the 2 special symbols is a "big hit" is being executed, the continuous challenge effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁The performance control CPU 120 causes the characters "Continue Challenge" to be displayed in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B, and a character in the lower right part of the screen. 21 TM300 is displayed. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B. It has become.

When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing". Correspondingly, the combination of decorative symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, during the period during which the continuous challenge effect is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is not executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the reserved display area (first reserved display The reserved display (first reserved display 21TM010, second reserved display 21TM020) is not displayed in the area 21TM011 and the second reserved display area 21TM021). Also, neither the square object indicating the active display area 21TM031 nor the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

When the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, in FIGS. Based on being in a high base state (time saving state), a continuous challenge production of a failure mode is executed.

When the game state currently being controlled is the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), as shown in FIG. In response to the push button 31B being operated by the player when the player is in the game, the continuous challenge performance of the failure mode is executed, and the characters "failure" and the object "?" is displayed, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-13 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second symbol indicating that the display result is "lost". A combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) ("245" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-13 (4), when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, the "daytime image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "miss" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. Then, the combination of decorative patterns ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is stopped and displayed, and the previously executed ( In response to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed most recently was "missing", the combination of the first small symbols indicating that the variation display result is "missing" (in this example, " 417") is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variation display result of the second special design executed last time (executed most recently) is "off". In response to the event, the combination of the second small symbols ("245" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the active display area 21TM031 does not display the active display because there is no variable display currently being executed.

On the other hand, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, the currently controlled game state is set to high in FIGS. Based on the definite/high base state (variable definite state), the continuation challenge effect of the success mode is executed.

When the currently controlled game state is the high probability/high base state (probability variable state), as shown in FIG. In response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the player is on the stage, a continuous challenge effect in a success mode is executed, and the characters "success" and the object "○" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-13 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second symbol indicating that the display result is "lost". A combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) ("245" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-13 (7), when the game state is continuously controlled to the high probability / high base state (probability variable state), the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode to "FEVERZONE". controlled. When the presentation mode is "FEVERZONE", the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 was "miss". Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“245” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “loss” is confirmed and stopped, and the previously executed ( In response to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed most recently was "missing", the combination of the second small symbols indicating that the variation display result is "missing" (in this example, " 245") is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) is "off". In response to the event, the combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "miss" is continuously stopped and displayed. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 16-13, the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the second special In the 100th special game after the variable display result of the symbols becomes a "jackpot", the production control CPU 120 controls the transition from the first period to the second period (continuing the high base state). A continuation challenge production is executed as a suggestive production to suggest. According to such a configuration, even if it is controlled to any game state of low probability / high base state (time saving state) and high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the player continues Until the final variation of the first period in which the challenge performance is executed, the game can be played with expectations for the transition to the second period.

(other forms)
In the above-described gaming machine capable of changing the set value, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be simultaneously executed in parallel. Also, the game machine capable of changing the set value may be capable of controlling a small winning game state which is a game state different from the big winning game state and which is advantageous for the player. For example, in a small winning game state, a game ball can win a prize in a special variable winning ball device different from the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second start winning hole and the special variable winning ball device 7 forming the big winning hole. Become. Also, the game machine capable of changing the setting value may be capable of being controlled to a state (for example, a KT state described later) in which the frequency of small hits is increased.

For example, the special variable winning ball device is provided downstream of the variable winning ball device in the right gaming area. When the variable winning ball device is in the open state, the frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side in the open state is extremely low, and when the variable winning ball device is in the closed state, it is opened. Control may be executed to increase the frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side that is in the state. According to such a configuration, in a high base state in which the variable winning ball device is opened for a long period of time (or the opening frequency is high), the special variable winning ball device is in the open state even if the player hits to the right. The frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing in is low, but the period in which the variable winning ball device is opened is short (or the opening frequency is low). The frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the variable winning ball device is increased.

For example, it is assumed that the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, it is assumed that there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. And, when the game state is controlled to a low probability state and non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state), and a low probability state and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state: time saving state) When it is controlled, when it is controlled to a high probability state and 1KT state (high probability / 1st KT state; probability variable state), and when it is controlled to a high probability state and 2KT state (high probability / 2KT state: small hit RUSH state ) may be controlled by

In the first KT state among the KT states, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device is likely to be in an open state. There are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device (for example, about 1 ball per 100 variations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur, and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device is lengthened. In the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball easily wins the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball device will be in the open state due to the normal game is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of determining a small hit is low when the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio of determining a small win when the second special symbol fluctuates is high, so the KT state is maintained. , a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the variation of the second special symbol, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In this way, as the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the variable winning ball device is controlled to a state where small wins are likely to occur and to a low base state. By shortening the opening time of the game ball, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device. According to such a configuration, as a high-probability state advantageous to the player, it is possible to control to a high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) different from the high-probability/high base state (probability variable state). It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state.

(Other modifications)
(1) <Reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine>
In the above-described embodiment, once controlled to high probability / high base state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit game, the probability variable state continues until the next big hit occurs, but such Regardless of the form, the game state changes from a high probability/high base state to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) at the timing when a predetermined period has passed after the end of the big win game and before the next big win occurs. It may change.

For example, if the transition to the high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) until the next big hit occurs or 100 times of fluctuation display is completed ) is maintained. Then, when the 100th variation display is completed without the occurrence of the next big win, the transition is made from the 101st variation display to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), and the next big win occurs. Until then, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained. On the other hand, if the transition to the low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot game, until the next big hit occurs or 100 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state) ) is maintained, but from the 101st fluctuation display, the state shifts to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state). For the player, whether or not the 100th variable display can be overcome without falling to the normal state has a great influence on the degree of advantage thereafter. It is called a reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine.

In such a reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine, the 100th fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (after being controlled to the high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) or the low probability / 1KT state (time saving state)) There are a first period until the end of the display and a second period from the 101st variable display to the occurrence of the next big win. In the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period. It is assumed that the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variation display period (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that for the first period.

In the first period of this example, in any game state (high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) or low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the jackpot game, common as a background image is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is being controlled in the first period. Here, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variation display, the above-mentioned success mode is continued in the 100th variation display. A challenge performance is executed, and the transition from the 101st fluctuation display to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variation display, the above-mentioned failure mode continuation challenge is performed in the 100th variation display. An effect is executed, and from the 101st variable display, the state shifts to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

In this way, when the game state is the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), the game state is changed to a high probability in response to the execution of the variable display for a predetermined number of times before the next big hit occurs. / Since it is possible to shift to the 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the predetermined time of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

Also, for example, when the transition to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) occurs after the end of the big hit game, the high probability/first KT is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the number of occurrences of the small hit reaches 50 times. A state (variable probability state) may be maintained. Then, when the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times without the occurrence of the next big win, the fluctuation display after the end of the 50th small win game is changed to a high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) may be maintained until the next big hit occurs. On the other hand, when the transition to the low probability / 1KT state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game, until the next big hit occurs or the number of occurrences of the small hit reaches 50 times, the low probability / 1KT state ( The time saving state) is maintained, but after the 50th small winning game is completed, the state is shifted to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

That is, after the end of the big hit game (after being controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) or the low probability/first KT state), the first period until the 50th small hit occurs, and the 50th time There is a second period from the end of the small winning game to the occurrence of the next big winning. In the first period of this example, in any game state (high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) or low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the jackpot game, common as a background image is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is being controlled in the first period. Here, when the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the change to the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game is performed. In the variable display where the number of occurrences is the 50th, the continuous challenge effect of the success mode described above is executed, and from the next and subsequent variable display of the variable display where the number of occurrences of the small hit is 50 times, the high accuracy/second KT state (small Hit RUSH state). In addition, when the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the occurrence of the small win occurs. In the 50th variation display, the above-mentioned failure mode continuous challenge effect is executed, and from the next variation display in which the number of occurrences of small hits is 50, the low probability / non-KT state (normal state ).

In this way, when the game state is the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), the game state is changed in response to the number of occurrences of the small hit becoming a predetermined number before the next big hit occurs. Since it is possible to shift to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state), it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the predetermined time of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

(2) <Type 1/2 type mixer>
In a game machine of a type called the first type, a big win determination is performed based on establishment of a starting condition, and a big win game is executed when a big win is won. In addition, in a game machine of a type called the second type (wings), an opening and closing winning device having a feather accessory that can be opened and closed is provided, a game ball wins inside the opening and closing winning device, and the opening and closing winning device When winning a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside, a big hit game is executed. There is also a type of game machine called a 1st-2nd type mixer that fuses the 1st type and the 2nd type (feathers).

For example, in a one-and-two mixed machine, a big hit determination is made based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the game ball wins in the first start winning port), and when the big win is won, the first special The variation display result of the pattern becomes a big win pattern, and a big win game is executed. In addition, a big hit determination is performed based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, the game ball has passed through the second start area (gate)), and when the big hit is won, the second special symbol is displayed as a variable display result. becomes a big win symbol, and a big win game is executed. Further, when a small prize is won, a small prize game is executed in which a feather accessory provided in the opening and closing winning device opens and closes, and subsequently, the game ball wins inside the opening and closing prize device while the feather accessory is open, and , when winning in a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside the opening and closing winning device, a jackpot game is executed.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, the player wins the game ball in the first start winning opening by hitting left in the low base state, and after the big hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is high. With the control to the base state, the game is played so as to pass the game ball through the second starting area by switching to the right hitting. For example, this high base state (right-handed period) is continued until a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) of the second special symbol variable display is completed, and a big hit occurs during the predetermined number of variable display of the second special symbol. Otherwise, the playing state will transition to the low base state.

Here, in the production based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the variation display result of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) and the All the second special symbol fluctuation display results of each of the second reserved memories (for example, each of the three second reserved memories) existing at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times is started are notified. You may do so. That is, when the second reserved memory number is 3 at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) in the high base state is started, the second special for the predetermined number of times It is assumed that the results of the variable display of the second special symbol for a total of four times are notified by the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol. Then, after the variable display of the second special symbol is completed for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times. As for the variable display, a variable pattern with an extremely short variable display period (for example, 1 second) is specified. In other words, from the player's point of view, it looks as if four times of variable display have been executed by the effect corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the first and second mixing machine of this example, after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state), until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without a big hit, or The first period corresponds to a period until a big hit occurs before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. Also, after the game state shifts to the high-base state (time saving state), the period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without the occurrence of a big hit, that is, the special figure of the predetermined number of times The period during which the special game for the second reserved memory number at the start of the game is being executed corresponds to the second period.

In such a one-two-kind mixer, in the first period, the rate at which the variation pattern having a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than the predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is selected is the second period. In the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a shorter variation display period (eg, 1 second) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period.

(3) <Variable falling machine>
As a pachinko game machine, in a state where the game state is controlled to a high probability state, a probability variable fall determination is executed for whether or not to shift the game state to a low probability state, and the game state is based on the result of the probability variable fall determination. There is a pachinko machine that shifts to a low probability state. And, the pachinko game machine 1 that executes such probability variable fall determination is called a probability variable fall machine.

For example, in the probability variable falling machine, if a "variable probability big hit" occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) after the jackpot game state ends, and the variable display starts in the high probability / high base state (variable probability state) When the probability variation fall judgment is executed. Here, until the 100th variation display is started without the display result of the variation display executed in the high probability / high base state (probability variation state) becoming a "jackpot", (i) the 100th variation If it is determined that there is a "probable variable fall" in any of the probability variable fall judgments executed in response to the display, the variable display corresponding to the probability variable fall judgment (any of the 1st to 100th variable display ) is controlled to a low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) from the start, and after being maintained in a low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) until the 100th fluctuation display ends, a low accuracy / low base state ( normal state). Here, the period from when the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state until the 100th variation display is executed without falling to the normal state and without the occurrence of the jackpot. corresponds to the first period.

On the other hand, (ii) if it is not determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in any of the probability variable fall determinations executed in response to the 100th variable display, at least the 100th variable display is completed. / Maintained in the high base state (probability variable state), when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall judgment executed in response to the 101st or later variable display, the variable display corresponding to the probability variable fall judgment is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) from the start of Here, the period from the end of the 100th variation display in the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) to the normal state or the occurrence of the next big hit corresponds to the second period.

In such a variable falling machine, in the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern that has a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period. High, in the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a shorter variation display period (eg, 3 seconds) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, in the first period, the rate at which a variation pattern having a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is selected is higher than that in the second period. In the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a shorter variation display period (eg, 1 second) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period. However, the period other than the variable display period may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, in the first period, the design determination stop period (eg, 1.0 seconds) longer than the predetermined period (eg, 0.7 seconds), and in the second period, the predetermined period (eg, 0.7 seconds) A short symbol determination stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be used.

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A), in the first period, the ratio of selecting "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" as the fluctuation pattern is 0%. Although shown, it is not limited to such a form, and "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" may be selected as the fluctuation pattern even in the first period.

For example, in addition to the jackpot types shown in the present embodiment (see FIG. 16-3), when a jackpot of a type “2R probability variable jackpot [next time]” is provided, there is no 2R normal jackpot, so a round of jackpot games When the number of rounds is 2, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is "2R probability variable jackpot [next time]" and that it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the jackpot game. Become. Suppose, in the first period that shifts after the end of this "2R probability variable jackpot [next time]", a variation pattern that has a longer variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected. If the percentage of the winning rate is set higher than the second period, the variable display is made even though the player recognizes that the game state is a high probability state (probability variable state) and that the state will continue until the next big win. The longer the period, the less interesting it becomes. Therefore, a specific jackpot type such as "2R probability variable jackpot [next time]", for example, a type that confirms that the probability variable state will continue until the next jackpot when the jackpot game ends without a normal jackpot of the same number of rounds In the first period after the end of the jackpot game, the variation pattern is determined based on the same variation pattern determination table as in the second period. As a result, it is possible to increase the percentage of determining the fluctuation pattern as "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)", shorten the fluctuation time in the first period, and prevent a decline in interest.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the selection ratio of the variable display period in the first period is different from the selection ratio of the variable display period in the second period. The execution ratio may be different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period.

For example, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) based on the determination result at the time of starting winning or the determination result at the start of fluctuation. Here, the execution ratio of the change effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period may be different. In both the first period and the second period, the change effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game in the high probability/high base state (variable probability state) can be improved. In the first period, since the variable display period is long, the change performance requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the change performance is preferably low. As a result, in the first period, the period required for the occurrence of the next big hit is lengthened, so that gambling characteristics are prevented from becoming excessively high, and sound game characteristics can be realized, and at the same time, a change effect can be achieved. By executing at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the change performance to be lower than that in the first period, the change performance is executed at a high rate even though the big win is not generated for a long period of time, resulting in a decrease in interest. can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning or the determination result at the time of start of fluctuation, action effects (for example, the character is displayed with respect to the suspension display or active display) to execute an action) can be executed. Here, the execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period and the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period may be different. Since the action effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability/high base state (variable probability state). In the first period, since the variable display period is long, the action performance requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the action performance should be low. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, thereby realizing a sound game property and effecting effects. By executing at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the action performance to be lower than that in the first period, the action performance is executed at a high rate even though the big win is not generated for a long period of time, resulting in a decrease in interest. can be prevented.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a pre-reading announcement effect that announces the degree of expectation for a big hit of variable displays that are not executed (variable displays whose execution is suspended). Here, the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect in the second period may be different. In both the first period and the second period, the look-ahead announcement effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game in the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) can be improved. In the first period, since the variable display period is long, it is possible to execute the look-ahead foretelling performance requiring a predetermined period at a high rate, and for the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the look-ahead foretelling performance is preferably low. As a result, in the first period, the period required for the occurrence of the next big hit is lengthened, so that gambling properties are prevented from becoming excessively high, sound game properties can be realized, and a look-ahead notice effect can be achieved. is executed at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice performance to be lower than that in the first period, the pre-reading notice performance is executed at a high rate even though the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time. can be prevented from decreasing.

In the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of setting suggestion effects may differ between the first period and the second period. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 16-10(A) may be 10% in the first period and 2% in the second period. Conversely, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be 2% in the first period and 10% in the second period. In addition, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may differ according to the number of variable displays performed in the second period. For example, as the number of variable displays performed in the second period increases The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be increased as the inter-harmony becomes longer. Specifically, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 2% during the period of 101 to 150 fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, but the period from 151 fluctuations to 200 fluctuations is the second The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be 5%, and after the 201st variation, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be 10%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a prolonged addiction between probability variations.

In the above embodiment, as a special effect related to setting suggestions, a first setting suggestion effect suggesting which of low settings (1, 2), intermediate settings (3, 4), and high settings (5, 6) and the second setting suggestion effect suggesting whether it is an odd number setting (1, 3, 5) or an even number setting (2, 4, 6). may be an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed or that the setting value has not been changed. For example, if the setting change mode for changing the setting value is controlled when the power is turned on, during the subsequent demonstration display or during the game during execution), an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed. In addition, if the setting change mode is controlled and the setting value is changed according to the setting change operation, during the subsequent demonstration display or during the game (for example, if there is a pending memory or if the variable display of the special symbol is during execution), an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10... General winning port 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Sound control board 14... LED control board 15... Relay board 17... Special variable winning ball device 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting Mouth switch 23... First count switch 24... Second count switch 30... Ball-hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
a predetermined period clock means for timing a predetermined period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game;
special variable display means capable of variably displaying the special identification information and displaying the result of the variable display;
special variable display timing means for timing a special variable display period during which special identification information is variably displayed;
stop period clocking means for timing a variable display stop period from when the variable display of the special identification information is stopped to when the variable display of the next special identification information is started;
production control means capable of controlling production;
an advantageous state notification effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous state notification effect for notifying that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
an advantageous state notification timing means for timing an advantageous state notification period during which the advantageous state notification effect is executed;
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the game machine is started and before the interrupt process is executed,
The interrupt processing is executed after the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt processing is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the variable display stop period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the variable display stop period is interrupted until the end of the variable display stop period, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the variable display stop period is resumed,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the predetermined period is being counted, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. until the predetermined period of time is interrupted, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the predetermined period of time is resumed;
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the advantageous state notification period is interrupted until the period ends, and the timing of the advantageous state notification period is resumed when the setting confirmation state ends,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the special variable display period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end of the special variable display period, and the timing of the special variable display period is restarted when the setting confirmation state ends,
The production control means is
When being controlled to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to receive operation confirmation information for confirming the operation of the predetermined effect means,
When receiving the operation confirmation information in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute processing according to the operation confirmation information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images